WO2004092123A2 - Inhibitors of fungal invasion - Google Patents

Inhibitors of fungal invasion Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2004092123A2
WO2004092123A2 PCT/US2004/011187 US2004011187W WO2004092123A2 WO 2004092123 A2 WO2004092123 A2 WO 2004092123A2 US 2004011187 W US2004011187 W US 2004011187W WO 2004092123 A2 WO2004092123 A2 WO 2004092123A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
alkyl
compound
substituted
optionally substituted
halo
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2004/011187
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2004092123A3 (en
Inventor
John Jeffrey Talley
Angelika Fretzen
Craig Zimmerman
Timothy. Barden
Jing Jing Yang
Eduardo Martinez
G. Todd Milne
A. Cordero Etchell
M. Pierce Christine
Fariba Houman
Robert Busby
Eric F. Summers
Stephen Antonelli
Peter Lee
Michael Farwell
Maria Mayorga
Jessica O'leary
Original Assignee
Microbia, Inc.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Microbia, Inc. filed Critical Microbia, Inc.
Publication of WO2004092123A2 publication Critical patent/WO2004092123A2/en
Publication of WO2004092123A3 publication Critical patent/WO2004092123A3/en

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D401/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D277/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings
    • C07D277/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings not condensed with other rings
    • C07D277/20—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D277/32—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-thiazole or hydrogenated 1,3-thiazole rings not condensed with other rings having two or three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D277/38—Nitrogen atoms
    • C07D277/50—Nitrogen atoms bound to hetero atoms
    • C07D277/52—Nitrogen atoms bound to hetero atoms to sulfur atoms, e.g. sulfonamides
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D417/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00
    • C07D417/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D417/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, at least one ring having nitrogen and sulfur atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D415/00 containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links

Definitions

  • This invention relates to nitrogenous heterocycle-based inhibitors of fungal invasion.
  • Candida infections are a serious health concern, particularly for patients whose immune systems have been compromised by disease, chemotherapy, or i munosuppressive drugs.
  • the frequency of Candida infections has increased in recent years and has been accompanied by a significant rise in morbidity and mortality.
  • Candidiasis which is most often caused by the pathogenic yeast Candida albicans, is the most frequent fungal infection associated with AIDS and other immunocompromised states. Many of these infections take place in the hospital setting.
  • Plant diseases are caused.by a myriad of invasive fungal pathogens falling into many genera, for example, soft rot (e.g., Rhizopus), leaf curl (e.g., Taphrina), powdery mildew (e.g., Sphaerotheca), leaf spots (e.g., Fulvia), blight (e.g., Alternaria), blast (e.g., Magnaporthe), black rot (e.g., Guignardia), scab (e.g., Venturia), wilts (e.g., Fusarium), rusts (e.g., Puccinia), smuts (e.g., Ustilago), and cankers (e.g., Rhizoctonia).
  • soft rot e.g., Rhizopus
  • leaf curl e.g., Taphrina
  • powdery mildew e.g., Sphaerotheca
  • leaf spots e.g., Ful
  • Candida albicans has been shown to be dependent upon invasion of host tissues; mutations in any of several genes required for invasive growth substantially reduce virulence in a mouse model of systemic infection.
  • the SSK1 response regulator gene from C. albicans is essential for normal hyphal development and virulence.
  • Cosl a two-component histidine kinase, is required for normal hyphal growth of C. albicans, and may play a role in virulence properties of the organism.
  • Deletion of the C. albicans gene encoding the mitogen-activated protein kinase Hogl causes derepression of serum induced hyphal formation and a dramatic increase in the survival time of systemically infected mice. Disruption of the C.
  • albicans mitogen activated protein kinase gene, CEKl adversely affects the growth of serum induced mycelial colonies and attenuates virulence in a mouse model for systemic candidiasis.
  • This invention relates to nitrogenous heterocycle-based inhibitors of fungal invasion (i.e. anti- invasion or anti-invasin agents), compositions comprising such compounds, and methods of treating fungal infections.
  • the invention features compounds useful in the therapeutic or prophylactic treatment of fungal infection.
  • fungi which cause fungal infections in humans include, without limitation,
  • Absidia spp. Absidia corymbifera, Ajellomyces capsulatus, Ajellomyces dermatitidis, Allescheria boydii, Alternaria spp., Anthopsis deltoidea, Aphanomyces spp., Apophysomyces elequans, Armillaria spp., Arnium leoporinum, Arthroderma benhamiae, Arthroderma fulvurn, Arthroderma gypseum, Arthroderma incurvatum, Arthroderma otae, Arthroderma vanbreuseghemii, Aspergillus spp., Aspergillus flavus, Aspergillus fumigatus, Aspergillus niger, Aureobasidium pullulans, Basisdiobolus ranarum, Bipolaris spp., Blastomyces dermatitidis, Botrytis spp., Candida spp., Candida albican
  • fungi that cause infections in animals include, without limitation, Alternaria spp.,
  • Aspergillus spp. Candida spp., Cladosporium spp.,, Geotrichum spp., Microsporum canis, Microsporum eguinum, Microsporum gallinae, Microsporum nanum, Paecilomyces spp., Penicillium spp., Trichophyton mentagrophytes, and Trichophyton verucosum.
  • Certain compounds described herein inhibit fungal invasion and/or reduce viability and/or the replication of fungal cells.
  • the compounds may also be useful for treating, either therapeutically or prophylactically, fungal infections that are not invasive.
  • Preferred compounds are substantially non-toxic to a mammal at dosages that are effective for inhibiting fungal invasion in vivo.
  • Some inhibitors of fungal invasion are not by themselves fungicidal or fungistatic but when administered alone result in effective treatment of disease.
  • some compounds described herein when administered in combination with a fungicidal or fungistatic agent, the combination is an effective therapy and is more effective than the fungicidal or fungistatic agent alone.
  • this invention features compounds having a formula (A):
  • each of R , R , R , and R is, independently, hydrogen, or C C 6 alkyl
  • A is NR s R 6 ;
  • B is CR'R 8 ; oris absent
  • the dashed lines between A and B and between B and C are bonds when B is present, or unshared electron pairs on A and C when B is absent;
  • R 5 is hydrogen; or R 5 and R 7 together are a bond when B is present;
  • R b is R a C(0 , or is absent
  • R 7 and R 5 together are a bond when B is present;
  • R 8 is C,-C 4 alkyl, optionally substituted with R b R c or R a C(Q)-
  • R 9 is C 6 -C ⁇ o aryl, optionally substituted with hydrogen, halo, or -C 4 alkyl;
  • R is hydrogen, or is absent; R a ⁇ s d-C 4 alkylj optionally substituted with halo, NR b R c or -C(0)NHNHC(0)R d ;
  • R b and R c is, independently, C ⁇ -C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 aminoalkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkylaminoalkyl, C 2 -C 6 dialkylaminoalkyl, C 7 -C ⁇ aralkyl, or R e C(0)-; or R and R c together are heterocyclyl, or heterocycloalkenyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 R f ;
  • R d is C 6 -C ⁇ o aryl or 3-10 membered heteroaryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 R g ;
  • R e is C C 6 alkyl, C 7 -C ⁇ aralkyl, C 6 -C ⁇ o aryl, or C 6 -C 10 arylamino, each of which may be substituted with - C 4 alkyl, halo or C C alkoxy;
  • R f is oxo or C ⁇ -C 6 alkyl
  • R ⁇ is hydrogen, halo, hydroxy, alkoxy, nitro, amino, cyano, carboxy, C ⁇ -C 6 alkyl, C 6 -C ⁇ 0 aryl, or 5-8 membered heteroaryl; and X is O or S.
  • B can be present or absent.
  • R 5 and R 7 together can be a bond, and R 8 can be substituted with NR b R c , e.g., CH(NR b R c )CH 3 or CH(NR b R c )CH 2 CH 3 .
  • R b can be (CH 3 ) 2 NCH 2 CH 2 , benzyl, or C C 6 alkyl and R c can be R e C(0 , in which R e can be C 5 -
  • R c can be R e C(0)-.
  • R e can be C 5 -C n alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted C ⁇ -Cio arylamino, wherein the substituents are selected from CH 3 or OCH 3 .
  • R 9 can be a substituted or unsubstituted phenyl, wherein the substituents are selected from halo or
  • C 1 -C 4 alkyl e.g., CH 3 or chloro
  • the invention also includes a method of treating a fungal infection in a subject, the method including administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound having a formula (A).
  • the method also includes administering to the subject an antifungal agent in combination with the compound.
  • the compound of formula (A) and the antifungal agent are administered simultaneously, the compound of formula (A) and the antifungal agent are administered sequentially, the method further includes identifymg the subject as a subject in need of treatment for a fungal infection, and the subject is a human.
  • ine invention also teatures a pnarmaceutical composition comprising a compound having a formula (A) in an amount effective to treat a fungal infection and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the composition includes an antifungal agent.
  • this invention relates to compounds having a formula (O):
  • R 1 and R 2 is, independently, C -C 9 alkyl; C 7 -C ⁇ 0 aralkyl; C 3 -C 9 alkenyl, optionally substituted with aryl; C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, optionally substituted with C ⁇ -C alkyl; or R a C(0)-;
  • R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , and R 6 is, independently, hydrogen or C C alkyl
  • R a is 3-8 membered heterocyclyl, optionally substituted with acyl; C 7 -C ⁇ 6 aralkyl optionally substituted with halo; or C 6 -C ⁇ 0 arylamino, optionally substituted with 0-3 C C 4 alkyl.
  • R 1 and R 2 can be C 7 -C ⁇ Q aralkyl, e.g., benzyl, -(CH 2 ) 2 Ph, or -(CH 2 ) 3 Ph.
  • R 1 and R 2 can be C 3 -C 9 alkenyl, e.g., 3-phenylallyl.
  • R 1 and R 2 can be C 4 -C 9 alkyl.
  • R 1 and R 2 can be C 7 -C )0 aralkyl.
  • R' and R' can be C 7 -C ⁇ 0 aralkyl and the other can be C3-C9 alkenyl.
  • the invention also includes a method of treating a fungal infection in a subject, the method including administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound having a formula (O).
  • the method also includes administering to the subject an antifungal agent in combination with the compound.
  • the compound of formula (O) and the antifungal agent are administered simultaneously
  • the compound of formula (O) and the antifungal agent are administered sequentially
  • the method further includes identifying the subject as a subject in need of treatment for a fungal infection, and the subject is a human.
  • the invention also features a pharmaceutical composition
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound having a formula (O) in an amount effective to treat a fungal infection and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the composition includes an antifungal agent.
  • this invention relates to compounds having a formula (L):
  • A is N or CH
  • R 1 is C C 12 alkyl, C 2 -C ⁇ 2 alkenyl, 5-12 membered heteroaryl, or R a C(0)-;
  • R 2 is C C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted with - HC(0)R b ; or C r C 4 alkoxy;
  • R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , and R 6 is, independently, hydrogen, or C ⁇ -C alkyl; "R* is '" C, ' -C ⁇ 2 alkyl; and
  • R b is C 6 -C 10 aryl.
  • Embodiments can include one or more of the following.
  • R 2 can be -OCH 2 CH 3 .
  • the invention also mcludes a method of treating a fungal infection in a subject, the method including administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound having a formula (L).
  • the method also includes administering to the subject an antifungal agent in combination with the compound.
  • the compound of formula (L) and the antifungal agent are administered simultaneously, the compound of formula (L) and the antifungal agent are administered sequentially, the method further includes identifymg the subject as a subject in need of treatment for a fungal infection, and the subject is a human.
  • the invention also features a pharmaceutical composition
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound having a formula (L) in an amount effective to treat a fungal infection and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the composition includes an antifungal agent.
  • this invention relates to compounds having a formula (E):
  • R' is C C 4 alkyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 R a ; C 7 -C ⁇ 6 aralkyl, optionally substituted with 1-
  • A is C 6 -C ⁇ o aryloxy, optionally substituted with thioaryloxy or thioalkoxy; 3-8 membered heterocyclyl, optionally substituted with C 7 -C ⁇ 6 aralkyl; or CHR 7 R 8 ;
  • R 2 is hydrogen or hydroxy; or R 2 and R 7 together are a bond;
  • R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , and R 6 is, independently, hydrogen, C ⁇ -C 4 alkyl, or C ⁇ -C 4 alkoxy;
  • R 7 is hydrogen; or R 7 and R 2 together are a bond;
  • R 8 is aryl, optionally substituted with -C alkoxy
  • Each R a is, independently, hydroxy; C ⁇ -C 6 alkyl; C ⁇ -C 4 alkoxy; C ⁇ -Cio aryloxy, optionally substituted with halo; 5-8 membered heteroaryl, optionally substituted with C C 4 alkyl; C 6 -C ⁇ 0 aryl, " optionally substituted with C 2 -C 6 dialkylamino or methylenedioxo; C 7 -C ⁇ e aralkoxy; or allyloxy.
  • R 1 can be -C 4 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 7 aralkyl, or substituted or unsubstituted 6- membered heteroaralkyl; preferred substituents include C C 2 alkoxy, benzyloxy, allyloxy, F, Br, (CH 3 ) 2 N, CH 3 , methylenedioxo, or (CH 3 ) 2 CHNHC(0)-.
  • A can be CHR 7 R 8 or aryloxy.
  • R 8 can be C 7 aralkyl.
  • R 7 and R 2 together can be a bond.
  • the invention also includes a method of treating a fungal infection in a subject, the method including administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound having a formula (E).
  • the method also includes administering to the subject an antifungal agent in combination with the compound.
  • the compound of formula (E) and the antifungal agent are administered simultaneously
  • the compound of formula (E) and the antifungal agent are administered sequentially
  • the method further includes identifying the subject as a subject in need of treatment for a fungal infection, and the subject is a human.
  • the invention also features a pharmaceutical composition
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound having a formula (E) in an amount effective to treat a fungal infection and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the composition includes an antifungal agent.
  • this invention relates to compounds having a formula (C):
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , and R 4 is, independently, hydrogen, halo, or C ⁇ -C 4 alkyl
  • R 5 is hydrogen
  • A is NR 7 or CH 2 ;
  • R 6 is hydrogen; Ci-C ⁇ alkylamino, optionally substituted with R a ; C 6 -C ⁇ 0 aryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 R a ; or C5-C 1 0 heteroaryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 R a ; or R 6 and R 7 together are 3-8 membered heterocyclyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 R b ;
  • R 7 is hydrogen; C 7 -C ⁇ 6 aralkyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 R c ; or -C(0)R d ; or R 7 and R 6 together are 3-8 membered heterocyclyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 R b ;
  • Each R a is, independently, halo; methylenedioxo; C 6 -C ⁇ 0 aryloxy, optionally substituted with halo; or C C alkoxy;
  • Each R b is, independently, hydroxy, oxo, or C C 6 alkyl
  • Each R c is, independently, C C 4 alkyl or -G, alkoxy
  • R d is C 6 -C ⁇ o aryl, optionally substituted with halo or C C 4 alkyl; 5-8 membered heteroaryl; 3-8 membered heterocyclyl; or 5-10 membered heterocycloalkenyl.
  • A can be CH 2 or NR 7 , in which R 7 can be C 7 aralkyl or -C(0)R d .
  • R u can be C ⁇ -C 4 alkylamino substituted with 4-halophenoxy, e.g., when A is CH 2 .
  • R d can be phenyl or halo-substituted phenyl.
  • the invention also includes a method of treating a fungal infection in a subject, the method including administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound having a formula (C).
  • the method also includes administering to the subject an antifungal agent in combination with the compound.
  • the compound of formula (C) and the antifungal agent are administered simultaneously
  • the compound of formula (C) and the antifungal agent are administered sequentially
  • the method further includes identifying the subject as a subject in need of treatment for a fungal infection, and the subject is a human.
  • the invention also features a pharmaceutical composition
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound having a formula (C) in an amount effective to treat a fungal infection and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the composition includes an antifungal agent.
  • this invention relates to compounds having a formula (AA):
  • A is -NHR 3 ; -OR 4 ; SR 5 ; 3-8 membered heteroaryl, optionally substituted with C 6 arylsulfonyl that is substituted with l-3R a ; 3-8 membered heterocyclyl, optionally substituted with C ⁇ arylsulfonyl that is substituted with l-3R a ; R * and " together are fused C 6 aryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 R a ; or fused 5-membered heteroaryl, optionally substituted with 1-2 R a ;
  • R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 are each, independently, C ⁇ - 2 alkyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 R b ; C 7 -C ⁇ 0 aralkyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 R b ; 6-12 membered heteroaralkyl, optionally substituted with with 1-3 R b ; 5-10 membered heteroaryl, optionally substituted with with 1-3 R b ; (C C 3 ) alkylene-0-(C C 4 ) alkyl; or (C C 3 ) alkylene-O-(C 6 -C 10 ) aryl;
  • Each R a is, independently, halo, C ⁇ -C 6 alkyl, fused Cs-C 7 cycloalkyl, C 6 -C ⁇ 0 aryl or 5-10 membered heteroaryl;
  • Each R is, independently, halo, - alkoxy, methylenedioxo, -C 4 haloalkyl, NH 2 , di(C C alkyl)amino, (C C alkyl)amino; or a salt thereof.
  • X is N.
  • R 1 and R 2 together can be fused substituted or unsubstituted thienyl; preferred substituents include -C 4 alkyl, fused cyclohexyl, or phenyl.
  • A can be -NHR 3 , in which R 3 can be substituted or unsubstituted C C 5 alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted C 7 -C 8 aralkyl; preferred substituents include halo, OCH 3 , methylenedioxo, or (CH 3 ) 2 N.
  • the invention also includes a method of treating a fungal infection in a subject, the method including administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound having a formula (AA).
  • the method also includes administering to the subject an antifungal agent in combination with the compound.
  • the compound of formula (AA) and the antifungal agent are administered simultaneously
  • the compound of formula (AA) and the antifungal agent are administered sequentially
  • the method further includes identifying the subject as a subject in need of treatment for a fungal infection, and the subject is a human.
  • the invention also features a pharmaceutical composition
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound having a formula (AA) in an amount effective to treat a fungal infection and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the composition includes an antifungal agent.
  • this invention relates to compounds having a formula (AB):
  • R 1 is C5-C 10 heteroaryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 R a ;
  • R 2 is C 6 -C ⁇ o arylsulfonyl, optionally substituted with halo; C C 6 alkyl; -C(0)R b ; or C 7 -C ]6 aralkyl;
  • R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , and R 6 is hydrogen
  • Each R a is, independently, halo; C 6 -C I0 aryl, optionally substituted with halo, hydroxy, or - alkoxy; or C ⁇ -C 4 alkyl;
  • R b is NHR C ; 5-10 membered heteroaryl; or C 6 -C ⁇ 0 aryl, optionally substituted withl-2 - alkoxy; and
  • R c is C 6 -C ⁇ o aryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 halo.
  • R ! can be substituted or unsubstituted quinazolinyl, quinolinyl, or pyrimidinyl.
  • R 2 can be Cj-C 4 alkyl (e.g., CH 2 CH 3 )or -C(0)R b , in which R b can be substituted or unsubstituted arylamino or heteroaryl.
  • the invention also includes a method of treating a fungal infection in a subject, the method including administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound having a formula (AB).
  • the method also includes administering to the subject an antifungal agent in combination with the compound.
  • the compound of formula (AB) and the antifungal agent are administered simultaneously, the compound of formula (AB) and the antifungal agent are administered sequentially, the method further mcludes identifying the subject as a subject in need of treatment for a fungal infection, and the subject is a human.
  • the invention also features a pharmaceutical composition
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound having a formula (AB) in an amount effective to treat a fungal infection and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the composition includes an antifungal agent.
  • this invention relates to compounds having a formula (K):
  • R 1 is C-C 6 alkyl, C 7 -C 9 aralkyl, or -C(0)R a ;
  • R 2 and R 2' are each, independently, hydrogen; C C 4 alkyl; C 3 -C 5 cycloalkyl; -C(0)R b ; C 7 -Cj 6 aralkyl, optionally substituted with R c ; or 6-16 membered heteroaralkyl, optionally substituted with R c ; or R 2 and R 2' together are 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, optionally substituted with 1-5 C C 4 alkyl;
  • R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , and R 6 is hydrogen
  • R a is C C 4 alkyl or C C 4 alkoxy
  • R b is C 6 -C 10 aryl, optionally substituted with R° and/or 1-3 R d ; or 5-10 membered heteroaryl, optionally substituted with R c and/or 1-3 R d ;
  • R° is C 6 -C ⁇ o aryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 R d ; C 6 -C ⁇ 0 aryloxy, optionally substituted with 1- 3 R d ; C 3 -Cs cycloalkyl-C ⁇ -C 4 alkoxy; C 6 -C ⁇ 0 arylamino, optionally substituted with 1-3 R d ; C 6 -C ⁇ 0 thioaryloxy, optionally substituted with 1-3 R d ; or C 7 -C ⁇ 6 aralkoxy, optionally substituted with 1-3 R d ; and
  • Each R d is, independently, halo, C ⁇ -C 6 alkyl, C ⁇ -C 4 alkoxy, or C r C 4 haloalkyl.
  • Embodiments can include one or more of the following: R "1 can be -C 5 alkyl or C 7 -C 8 aralkyl.
  • R 2 and R 2' can be substituted or unsubstituted C 7 -C ⁇ 6 aralkyl (e.g., substituted or unsubstituted benzyl, -(CH 2 ) 2 Ph, or-(CH 2 ) 3 Ph); preferred substituents include aryloxy substituted with CH 3 , CF 3 , halo, or OCH 3 .
  • R 2 and R 2' can be CH 3 .
  • R 2 and R 2 can be hydrogen.
  • R 1 and R 2 can be substituted or unsubstituted C 7 -C ⁇ 6 aralkyl and the other can be CH 3 ; preferred substituents include aryloxy substituted with CH 3 , CF 3 , halo, or OCH 3 .
  • the invention also includes a method of treating a fungal infection in a subject, the method including administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound having a formula (K).
  • the method also includes administering to the subject an antifungal agent in combination with the compound.
  • the compound of formula (K) and the antifungal agent are administered simultaneously
  • the compound of formula (K) and the antifungal agent are administered sequentially
  • the method further includes identifying the subject as a subject in need of treatment for a fungal infection, and the subject is a human.
  • the invention also features a pharmaceutical composition
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound having a formula (K) in an amount effective to treat a fungal infection and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the composition includes an antifungal agent.
  • this invention features compounds having a formula (R):
  • ' is C ⁇ -(J 2 ai ⁇ yi or (J 2 alkenyl
  • R 2 and R 2' are each, independently, hydrogen or CHR 3 R 4 ;
  • R 3 is C 5 -C ⁇ 4 heteroaryl, optionally substituted with C r C 4 alkoxy;
  • R 4 is OR 5 ;
  • R 5 is C 6 -C ⁇ 4 aryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 R a ; -C(0)R b ; 6-14 membered heteroaryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 R a ; C 7 -C 16 aralkyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 R a ;
  • Each R a is, independently, halo, C ⁇ -C 5 alkyl, or C C 4 alkoxy;
  • R b is C 6 -C ⁇ o aryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 R a ; or 5-10 membered heteroaryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 R a .
  • R 3 can be unsubstituted or methoxy-substituted quinolinyl.
  • R 5 can be aryl or heteroaryl.
  • the carbon to which R 3 and R 4 is attached can have the S configuration or the R configuration.
  • the invention also includes a method of treating a fungal infection in a subject, the method including administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound having a formula (R).
  • the method also includes administering to the subject an antifungal agent in combination with the compound.
  • the compound of formula (R) and the antifungal agent are administered simultaneously
  • the compound of formula (R) and the antifungal agent are administered sequentially
  • the method further includes identifying the subject as a subject in need of treatment for a fungal infection, and the subject is a human.
  • the invention also features a pharmaceutical composition
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound having a formula (R) in an amount effective to treat a fungal infection and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the composition includes an antifungal agent.
  • this invention features compounds having a formula (I):
  • Ri is substituted or unsubstituted C ⁇ -C ⁇ 2 alkyl, or substituted or unsubstituted C ⁇ - 2 alkoxy, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halo and hydroxy;
  • R 2 is H or halo;
  • R 3 is H, formyl, acetyl, or substituted or unsubstituted C r C 3 alkyl, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halo and hydroxy.
  • R 4 -R s is, independently:
  • R 9 is C 3 -C 10 cycloalkyl, optionally substituted with halo or hydroxy; or -C ⁇ alkyl, optionally substituted with halo, hydroxy, or C 3 -C ⁇ 0 cycloalkyl.
  • Each R 10 is, independently, halo, hydroxy, OR a , OR b , acyloxy, nitro, amino, NHR a , N(R a ) 2 , NHR b , N(R b ) 2 , aralkylamino, mercapto, thioalkoxy, S(0)R a , S(0)R b , S0 2 R a , S0 2 R b , NHS0 2 R a , NHS0 2 R b , sulfate, phosphate, cyano, carboxyl, C(0)R a , C(0)R b , C(0)OR a , C(0)NH 2 , C(0)NHR a , C(0)N(R a ) 2 , alkyl, haloallcyl, C 3 -C ⁇ 0 cycloalkyl containing 0-3 Rdin
  • R a is C ⁇ -C 6 alkyl optionally substituted with halo, hydroxy, alkoxy, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, sulfate, or phosphate.
  • R b is aryl optionally substituted with halo, haloalkyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, nitro, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, sulfate, or phosphate.
  • Each R c is independently halo, haloalkyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, oxo, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, sulfate, or phosphate.
  • Each R is independently halo, haloalkyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, nitro, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, sulfate, or phosphate; provided that at least one of R 4 -R 8 is not hydrogen; further provided that when R 1 is (CH 3 ) 2 CCH 2 CH 3 or C(CH 3 ) 3 , R 6 is not CH 3 ; further provided that when R 1 is CH(CH 3 ) 2 , R 6 is not OCH 3 or CH 3 ; and further provided that when R 1 is CH 3 , R 4 and R 7 are not Cl.
  • this invention features a pharmaceutical composition that contains an amount (e.g., an effective amount) of at least one of the compounds described above (e.g. a compound having the formula I and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the composition can contain a second antimicrobial agent.
  • this invention features a method of treating a fungal infection in a subject (including a subject identified as in need of such treatment), the method includes administering an effective amount of a compound (e.g. a compound having the formula I or a pharmaceutical composition described above to the subject.
  • a compound e.g. a compound having the formula I or a pharmaceutical composition described above
  • the method can include administering a compound or a pharmaceutical composition described above to the subject in combination with a second antimicrobial agent.
  • this invention features compounds having a formula (TJ):
  • each of R 1 and R 2 is, independently, H, substituted or unsubstituted C ⁇ -C ⁇ 2 alkyl, or substituted or unsubstituted -C 12 alkoxy, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of hydroxy and halo;
  • R 3 is H, formyl, acetyl, or substituted or unsubstituted - alkyl, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of hydroxy and halo.
  • R -R is, independently:
  • R is -C 1 0 cycloalkyl, optionally substituted with halo or hydroxy, or C ⁇ -C ]2 alkyl, optionally substituted with halo, hydroxy, or C 3 -C ⁇ 0 cycloalkyl.
  • Each of R 10 is, independently, halo, hydroxy, OR a , OR b , acyloxy, nitro, amino, NHR a , N(R a ) 2 , NHR b , N(R b ) 2 , aralkylamino, mercapto, thioalkoxy, S(0)R a , S(0)R b , S0 2 R a , S0 2 R b , NHS0 2 R a , NHS srilfa't ⁇ ' pHdsph' T r ⁇ ah' ⁇ rcarboxyl, C(0)R a , C(0)R b , C(0)OR a , C(0)NH 2 , C(0)NHR a , C(0)N(R a ) 2 , alkyl, haloalkyl, C 3 -C ]0 cycloalkyl containing 0-3 R c , C 3 -C 10 heterocyclyl containing 0-3 R
  • R a is C ⁇ -C 6 alkyl optionally substituted with halo, hydroxy, alkoxy, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, sulfate, or phosphate.
  • R b is aryl optionally substituted with halo, haloalkyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, nitro, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, sulfate, or phosphate.
  • Each R c is independently halo, haloalkyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, oxo, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, sulfate, or phosphate;
  • Each R is independently halo, haloalkyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, nitro, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, sulfate, or phosphate.
  • Embodiments include one or more of the following.
  • R 1 can be C C 4 alkyl (e.g., CH 3 ).
  • R 4 , R 5 , R 7 , and R 8 can be H.
  • R 3 can be H.
  • R 6 can be C ⁇ -C 6 alkyl.
  • R 6 can be OR 9 , and R 9 can be C C 6 alkyl, C 5 -C 8 cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopentyl or 2-norbornyl), or C ⁇ -C 4 alkyl substituted with C 3 -C 5 cycloalkyl.
  • R 9 can be C C 6 alkyl, C 5 -C 8 cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopentyl or 2-norbornyl), or C ⁇ -C 4 alkyl substituted with C 3 -C 5 cycloalkyl.
  • R 6 can be phenyl substituted with R 10 (e.g., halo). In certain embodiments, R 4 or R 5 can be fluoro when R 6 is phenyl substituted with R 10 .
  • this invention features a pharmaceutical composition that contains an amount (e.g., an effective amount) of at least one of the compounds described above (e.g., a compound having the formula II and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the composition can contain a second antimicrobial agent.
  • this invention features a method of treating a fungal infection in a subject (including a subject identified as in need of such treatment), the method includes administering an effective amount of a compound (e.g. a compound having the formula II or a pharmaceutical composition described above to the subject.
  • a compound e.g. a compound having the formula II or a pharmaceutical composition described above
  • the method can include administering a coi ipo ⁇ hd d i r l a"rj ⁇ a hi'aceutic ⁇ [l rJbfr ⁇ sition described above to the subject in combination with a second antimicrobial agent.
  • this invention features compounds having a formula (HI):
  • each of R n and R 12 is, independently, H, substituted or unsubstituted C ⁇ -C ⁇ 2 alkyl, or substituted or unsubstituted C ⁇ - ⁇ 2 alkoxy, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of hydroxy and halo.
  • R !3 is H, formyl, acetyl, or substituted or unsubstituted C C 3 alkyl, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of hydroxy and halo.
  • Each of R 14 -R 18 is, independently, H, halo, substituted or unsubstituted -C ⁇ alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C ]0 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C I2 alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 2 -C ⁇ 2 alkynyl, substituted or unsubstituted C C ⁇ 2 alkoxy, substituted or unsubstituted C 2 - C 12 alkenyloxy, substituted or unsubstituted (C 2 -C ⁇ 2 alkynyl)oxy, (C C 6 alkyl)oxy(C ⁇ -C 6 alkyl), substituted or unsubstituted C 6 -C ⁇ 2 aryloxy, (C 3 -C 6 heteroaryl)-( C ⁇ -C 6 alkyl)oxy, (C]-C 6 alkyl)thio, substituted or unsubstituted (C ⁇
  • this invention features a pharmaceutical composition that contains an amount (e.g., an effective amount) of at least one of the compounds described above (e.g. a compound having the f ⁇ 'rr uld 1 III Md- 'pria nac'eurl'caTly' , 'aoceptable carrier.
  • the composition can contain a second antimicrobial agent.
  • this invention features a method of treating a fungal infection in a subject (including a subject identified as in need of such treatment), the method includes administering an effective amount of a compound (e.g. a compound having the formula III or a pharmaceutical composition described above to the subject.
  • a compound e.g. a compound having the formula III or a pharmaceutical composition described above
  • the method can include administering a compound or a pharmaceutical composition described above to the subject in combination with a second antimicrobial agent.
  • this invention features compounds having a Formula (IV):
  • each of R 21 and R 22 is, independently, substituted or unsubstituted C ⁇ -C 6 alkyl, or substituted or unsubstituted C C 6 alkoxy, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of hydroxy and halo.
  • R is substituted or unsubstituted -C ⁇ alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C ]0 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 6 -C ]2 aryl, substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C (2 heteroaryl, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halo, -C 6 alkyl, C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, and - trihaloalkyl.
  • this invention features a pharmaceutical composition that contains an amount (e.g., an effective amount) of at least one of the compounds described above (e.g. a compound having the formula IV and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the composition can contain a second antimicrobial agent.
  • M ' one' asp , e l ct is'' fe ⁇ dn” features a method of treating a fungal infection in a subject (including a subject identified as in need of such treatment), the method includes administering an effective amount of a compound (e.g. a compound having the formula IV or a pharmaceutical composition described above to the subject.
  • the method can include administering a compound or a pharmaceutical composition described above to the subject in combination with a second antimicrobial agent.
  • this invention features compounds having a Formula (V):
  • each of R 21 and 22 is, independently, substituted or unsubstituted C ⁇ -C 6 alkyl, or substituted or unsubstituted C ⁇ -C 6 alkoxy, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of hydroxy and halo.
  • R 23 is substituted or unsubstituted C C 6 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C t0 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 6 -C 12 aryl, substituted or unsubstituted C 3 -C ⁇ 2 heteroaryl, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halo, -C ⁇ alkyl, C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, and C C 6 trihaloalkyl.
  • R 21 is CH 3 and R 23 is CH 3 , w-hexyl, cyclopentyl, phenyl, 4' -fluorophenyl, or thienyl.
  • this invention features a pharmaceutical composition that contains an amount (e.g., an effective amount) of at least one of the compounds described above (e.g. a compound having the formula V and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the composition can contain a second antimicrobial agent. lft"d ⁇ 'e'"a'sp'fect, ⁇ tH ⁇ , s"l erl ⁇ bn features a method of treating a fungal infection in a subject
  • the method mcludes administering an effective amount of a compound (e.g. a compound having the formula V or a pharmaceutical composition described above to the subject.
  • a compound e.g. a compound having the formula V or a pharmaceutical composition described above
  • the method can include administering a compound or a pharmaceutical composition described above to the subject in combination with a second antimicrobial agent.
  • this invention relates to a method of treating a fungal infection in a subject, the method includes administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound having a formula (VI):
  • R 1 is (CH 2 ) n C0 2 H, wherem n is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5;
  • R 1' and R 2' are hydrogen or C C 6 alkyl, or R 1 ' and R 2' together are a bond
  • R 3' and R 4' are hydrogen or C C 6 alkyl, or R 3' and R 4' together are a bond
  • R 5' and R 6' independently, are hydrogen or - alkyl, or R 5 and R 6 together are a bond
  • R 2' , R 3 , R 5 , and R 6 independently, are hydrogen or C ⁇ -C 6 alkyl and R 1 and R 4' together are a C 1 -C 3 alkylene group;
  • each R 2 , R 3 , R 5 , and R 6 independently, is hydrogen or C ⁇ -C 6 alkyl
  • R 4 is: C 1 -C 12 alkyl optionally substituted with C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, halo, hydroxy, mercapto, Ci- o alkoxy, C 1 -C 1 0 thioalkoxy, amino, C ⁇ -C I0 alkylamino, C ⁇ -C ]0 dialkylamino, or oxo; C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl optionally substituted with C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, halo, hydroxy, mercapto, -C 1 0 alkoxy, C ⁇ -C 10 thioalkoxy, amino, C C )0 alkylamino, C ⁇ -C 10 dialkylamino, or oxo; aryl optionally substituted with C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, halo, -C 1 0 haloalkyl, hydroxy, mercapto, - o alkoxy, C ⁇ -C 10 hydroxy
  • R 1' and R 2' together can be a bond
  • R 3' and R 4' together can be a bond
  • R 5' and R 6' together can be a bond.
  • n can be 0 or 1
  • R 4 can be C 3 -C 6 alkyl (e.g., «-propyl, iyo-propyl, sec-butyl, «-butyl, ra-pentyl, or ra-hexyi) or R 4 can be C 3 -C 6 cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclohexyl).
  • R 2 , R 3 , R 5 , and R 6 can be hydrogen.
  • R 1' , R 2' , R 3' , R 4' , R 5 , and R 6' can be hydrogen, and R 1 and R 4 can be trans or R 1 and R 4 can be cis.
  • n is 0 and R 1 and R 4 are trans, R 4 being C 3 -C 6 alkyl (e.g., /z-propyl, «-butyl, n- pentyl, or «-hexyl).
  • the method can further include administering a mixture of the cis isomer of the compound and the trans isomer of the compound.
  • the mixture can include at least about 95 percent of the trans isomer, at least about 98 percent of the trans isomer, or at least about 99 percent of the trans isomer.
  • the mixture can include at least about 95 percent of the cis isomer, at least about 98 percent of the cis isomer, or at least about 99 percent of the cis isomer.
  • R 2' , R 3' , R 5' , and R 6' can be hydrogen, and R 1' and R 4' together can be a -CH 2 CH 2 - group.
  • n can be 0 or 1 and R 4 can be C 3 -C 6 alkyl (e.g., «-propyl, «-butyl, //-pentyl, or n- hexyl).
  • n 0, 1, 2, or 3.
  • R 4 can be w-propyl, ra-butyl, n-pentyl, or n-hexyl.
  • R 4 can be phenyl
  • R 4 can be C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl.
  • R 4 can be C 2 -C 2 alkenyl.
  • R 4 can be C 2 -C ⁇ 2 alkynyl.
  • R 4 can beC Ci 2 alkyl substituted with halo, hydroxy, C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, C C ⁇ 0 alkoxy, C C ⁇ 0 thioalkoxy, amino, -C 10 alkylamino, Cj-Cio dialkylamino, or oxo.
  • the method can further include administering to the subject an antimicrobial agent in combination with the compound.
  • the compound of formula (T) and the antimicrobial agent can be administered simultaneously or sequentially.
  • the method can further include identifying the subject (e.g., a human subject) as a subject in need of treatment for a fungal infection.
  • a subject e.g., a human subject
  • ''M ' an' ⁇ fhefisp ' e'ct ⁇ m ⁇ S rlVMtfbn relates to a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound having a formula (VI) in an amount effective to treat a fungal infection and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier,
  • R 1 is (CH 2 ) n C0 2 H, wherein n is 0, 1 , 2, 3 , 4, or 5 ;
  • R 1' and R 2 are hydrogen or C C 6 alkyl, or R 1 and R 2' together are a bond
  • R 3 and R 4 independently, are hydrogen or C ⁇ -C 6 alkyl, or R 3' and R 4' together are a bond
  • R 5' and R 6 independently, are hydrogen or C ⁇ -C 6 alkyl, or R 5' and R 6' together are a bond
  • R 2' , R 3' , R 5' , and R 6' independently, are hydrogen or C ⁇ -C 6 alkyl and R 1 and R 4 together are a C C 3 alkylene group;
  • each R 2 , R 3 , R 5 , and R 6 independently, is hydrogen or C ⁇ -C 6 alkyl
  • R 4 is: C C ⁇ 2 alkyl optionally substituted with C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, halo, hydroxy, mercapto, Ci- o alkoxy, Ci-Cio thioalkoxy, amino, Ci- o alkylamino, C ⁇ -C 10 dialkylamino, or oxo; C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl optionally substituted with C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, halo, hydroxy, mercapto, Ci- o alkoxy, C ⁇ -C 10 thioalkoxy, amino, C ⁇ -C] 0 alkylamino, C C ⁇ o dialkylamino, or oxo; aryl optionally substituted with C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, halo, Ci-Cio haloalkyl, hydroxy, mercapto, Ci-Cio alkoxy, Ci- o hydroxyalkyl, C ⁇ -C ⁇ 0
  • Embodiments can include one or more of the following.
  • R 1' and R 2' together can be a bond
  • R 3 and R 4' together can be a bond
  • R 5' and R 6' together can be a bond
  • n can be 0 or 1
  • R 4 can be C 3 -C 6 alkyl (e.g., ?z-propyl, ra-butyl, n- pentyl, or ?z-hexyl) or R 4 can be C 3 -C6 cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclohexyl).
  • R", K", K% and R TM can ' be hydrogen.
  • R 1' , R 2' , R 3' , R 4' , R 5' , and R 6' can be hydrogen, and R 1 and R 4 can be trans or R 1 and R 4 can be cis.
  • n can be 0 and R 1 and R 4 are trans, R 4 being C 3 -C 6 alkyl (e.g., n-propyl, 7z-butyl, n-pentyl, or «-hexyl).
  • the composition can include a mixture of the cis isomer of the compound and the trans isomer of the compound.
  • the mixture can include at least about 95 percent of the trans isomer, at least about 98 percent of the trans isomer, or at least about 99 percent of the trans isomer.
  • the mixture can include at least about 95 percent of the cis isomer, at least about 98 percent of the cis isomer, or at least about 99 percent of the cis isomer.
  • R 2' , R 3' , R 5' , and R 6' are hydrogen, and R 1' and R 4' together are a -CH 2 CH 2 - group.
  • n can be 0 or 1 and R 4 can be C 3 -C 6 alkyl (e.g., ra-propyl, n-butyl, ⁇ -pentyl, or ra-hexyl).
  • n 0, 1, 2, or 3.
  • R 4 can be ⁇ -propyl, /z-butyl, «-pentyl, or «-hexyl
  • R 4 can be phenyl
  • R 4 can be C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl.
  • R 4 can be C 2 -C ⁇ 2 alkenyl.
  • R 4 can be C 2 -C ⁇ 2 alkynyl.
  • R 4 can C 1 -C12 alkyl substituted with halo, hydroxy, C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, - o alkoxy, Ci- o thioalkoxy, amino, Ci- o alkylamino, C 1 -C 10 dialkylamino,or oxo.
  • composition may further include an antimicrobial agent.
  • the composition may include a compound in which R 1' , R 2' , R 3' , R 4' , R 5' , and R 6' can be hydrogen and R 1 and R 4 can be trans, and may further include an antimicrobial agent, which is also a compound of formula (VI) in which R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , and R 6' are hydrogen and R 1 and R 4 are cis.
  • an antimicrobial agent which is also a compound of formula (VI) in which R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 , and R 6' are hydrogen and R 1 and R 4 are cis.
  • this invention features a pharmaceutical composition that contains an amount (e.g., an effective amount) of at least one of the compounds described above (e.g. a compound having the formula (VI)) and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the composition can contain a compound having the formula (VI), e.g., an antifungal compound, an antimicrobial agent, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • this invention features a method of treating a fungal infection in a subject (including a subject identified as in need of such treatment), the method includes administering an effective amount of a c ⁇ mpo ⁇ 'M" ' (e ' : ' g.”; a compound having the formula (VI)) or a pharmaceutical composition described above to the subject.
  • the method can further include administering a compound or a pharmaceutical composition described above to the subject in combination with an antimicrobial, e.g., antifungal, agent.
  • the compound or pharmaceutical composition and the antimicrobial agent can be administered simultaneously or sequentially.
  • this invention relates to a pharmaceutical composition including a compound having any of the formulae herein in an amount effective to treat a fungal infection and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the composition can include a compound having any of the formulae herein in an amount effective to treat a fungal infection, a second agent (e.g., an antimicrobial agent, a fungicidal agent, a fungistatic agent or an antifungal agent), and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • a second agent e.g., an antimicrobial agent, a fungicidal agent, a fungistatic agent or an antifungal agent
  • this invention features a method of inhibiting fungal invasion in a subject (including a subject identified as in need of such treatment), the method includes administering an effective amount of an anti-invasin agent and an antimicrobial agent (e.g., an antifungal agent such as a fungicidal agent or a fungistatic agent) to the subject.
  • an antimicrobial agent e.g., an antifungal agent such as a fungicidal agent or a fungistatic agent
  • this invention features a method of treating a fungal infection in a subject (including a subject identified as in need of such treatment), the method includes administering an effective amount of a compound having any of the formulae herein in an amount effective to treat a fungal infection or a pharmaceutical composition described above to the subject.
  • the method can further include administering a compound or a pharmaceutical composition described above to the subject in combination with an antimicrobial agent, e.g., an antifungal agent that is fungistatic or fungicidal.
  • an antimicrobial agent e.g., an antifungal agent that is fungistatic or fungicidal.
  • the compound having any of the formulae described above is an anti-invasin compound that is effective in therapeutic application only in combination wit fa fungicidal agent or a fungistatic agent.
  • the compound or pharmaceutical composition and the antimicrobial agent can be administered simultaneously or sequentially.
  • the antifungal agent is selected from the group consisting of: a polyene, a candin, a sordarin, an azole, an allylamine, a morpholine, and a pradimicin; and the antifungal agent acts by blocking ergosterol synthesis, by interfering with the cell wall, by interfering with the cell membrane, or by interfering with protein translation.
  • antifungal agent is agent is selected from the group consisting of: a polyene, a candin, a sordarin, an azole, an allylamine, a morpholine, and a pradimicin and the antifungal agent acts by blocking ergosterol synthesis, by interfering with the cell wall, by interfering with the cell membrane, or by interfering with protein translation.
  • " "' " ⁇ l ⁇ e invention also '' 'fearufes: ''1 a'method of treating a fungal infection in a subject, the method comprising administering an effective amount of an anti-invasin agent and an antifungal agent selected from the group consisting of a polyene, a candin, a sordarin, an azole, an allylamine, a morpholine, and a pradimicin; and a method of treating a fungal infection in a subject, the method comprising administering an effective amount of an anti-invasin agent and an antifungal agent, wherein the antifungal agent acts by blocking ergosterol synthesis, by interfering with the cell wall, by interfering with the cell membrane, or by interfering with protein translation.
  • the invention features: a pharmaceutical composition comprising an anti- invasin agent and an antifungal agent selected from the group consisting of: a polyene, a candin, a sordarin, an azole, an allylamine, a morpholine, and a pradimicin; and a pharmaceutical composition comprising an anti-invasin agent and an antifungal agent, wherein the antifungal agent acts by blocking ergosterol synthesis, by interfering with the cell wall, by interfering with the cell membrane, or by interfering with protein translation.
  • an anti- invasin agent selected from the group consisting of: a polyene, a candin, a sordarin, an azole, an allylamine, a morpholine, and a pradimicin
  • a pharmaceutical composition comprising an anti-invasin agent and an antifungal agent, wherein the antifungal agent acts by blocking ergosterol synthesis, by interfering with the cell wall, by inter
  • the anti-invasin agent has greater anti-invasin activity than fungal growth inhibition activity.
  • the anti-invasin agent is characterized as having: a) an IC 50 as dete ⁇ nined in the HWPl-lacZ reporter assay that is lOOx lower than the MlC growth as determined in liquid media; b) a MIC invas ⁇ on as determined in the morphology assay that is lOx lower than the MlC growt as determined in liquid media; c) a MIC invasion as determined in the plastic adherence assay that is lOx lower than the MlCgro th as determined in liquid media; d) a MICi ⁇ va sion as determined in the agar invasion assay that is lOx lower than the MlCg r owt h as determined in the agar invasion assay; or e) a MICi nvasi0n as determined in the migration across Caco-2 monolayer assay that is lOx lower than the MIC gr0Wth as determined in liquid media.
  • the anti-invasin agent is characterized as having: a) an IC 50 as determined in the HWPl-lacZ reporter assay that is lOOOx lower than the MlC growth as determined in liquid media; b) a MIC invas io n as determined in the morphology assay that is lOOx lower than the MlC gro th as determined in liquid media; c) a MICi nvas ; on as determined in the plastic adherence assay that is lOOx lower than the MlCg r owth as determined in liquid media; d) a MIC inV asio n as dete ⁇ nined in the agar invasion assay that is lOOx lower than the ICgro th as determined in the agar invasion assay; or e) a MIC; nVas i on as determined in the migration across Caco-2 monolayer assay that is lOOx lower than the MIC gr0wth as
  • the anti-invasin agent is characterized as having: a) an IC 5 o as determined in the HWPl-lacZ reporter assay that is lOOOOx lower than the MlC growth as determined in liquid media; b) a MIC; nV asio n as determined in the mo ⁇ hology assay that is lOOOx lower than the MlC growth as determined in I ⁇ quid ' med ⁇ a; c) a MIC invas i on as determined in the plastic adherence assay that is lOOOx lower than the MlCgrowth as determined in liquid media; d) a MICinvasio n as determined in the agar invasion assay that is lOOOx lower than the MIC gr0wth as determined in the same assay; or e) a MIC invasion as determined in the migration across Caco-2 monolayer assay that is lOOOx lower than the MlC growth as determined in liquid media.
  • the invention features a pharmaceutical composition comprising any of the forgoing anti-invasin agents and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the pharmaceutical composition further includes: an antifungal agent selected from the group consisting of: a polyene, a candin, a sordarin, an azole, an allylamine, a morpholine, and a pradimicin; or an antifungal agent, wherein the antifungal agent acts by blocking ergosterol synthesis, by interfering with the cell wall, by interfering with the cell membrane, or by interfering with protein translation.
  • Anti-invasin agents are agents which have anti-invasin activity as measured by one or more of the assays described herein for measuring anti-invasin activity (e.g., the HWPl-lacZ reporter assay, the mo ⁇ hology assay, the plastic adherence assay, the invasion in agar substrate assay, and the migration across Caco-2 monolayer assay).
  • Certain desirable anti-invasin agents have substantially greater anti- invasin activity than growth inhibition activity, e.g., the MIC inVas i on is 10X, 20X, 50X, 100X, 200X, 500X, 1000X, 2000X, 5000X or 10000X or more less than the MICg r0Wth when determined in same strain.
  • certain desirable compounds have significant anti-invasin activity yet have a MlC growth that is greater than 3 ⁇ g/ml, greater than 4 ⁇ g/ml, greater than 5 ⁇ g/ml, greater than 6 ⁇ g/ml, greater than 8 ⁇ g/ml, greater than 10 ⁇ g/ml, greater than 12 ⁇ g/ml, greater than 15 ⁇ g/ml, or even greater than 20 ⁇ g/ml.
  • the subject can be a mammal, preferably a human.
  • the method can further include identifying a subject having a fungal infection. Identifying a subject in need of such treatment can be in the judgment of a subject or a health care professional and can be subjective (e.g., opinion) or objective (e.g., measurable by a test or diagnostic method).
  • treating refers to administering a compound described herein to a subject with the pu ⁇ ose to cure, heal, alleviate, relieve, alter, remedy, ameliorate, improve, or affect a disease, e.g., an infection, the symptoms of the disease or the predisposition toward the disease.
  • a disease e.g., an infection, the symptoms of the disease or the predisposition toward the disease.
  • an effective amount refers to an amount of a compound that confers a therapeutic effect on the treated subject.
  • the therapeutic effect may be objective (i.e., measurable by some test or marker) or subjective (i.e., subject gives an indication of or feels an effect).
  • An effective amount of the compound described above may range from about 0.1 mg/Kg to about 500 mg/Kg, alternatively from about 1 to about 50 mg/Kg. Effective doses will also vary depending on route of administration, as well as the possibility of co-usage with other agents.
  • r " * "" ' ⁇ he term "Halo" or"''halogen” refers to any radical of fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine.
  • alkyl refers to a hydrocarbon chain that may be a straight chain or branched chain, containing the indicated number of carbon atoms. For example, C C ⁇ 2 alkyl indicates that the group may have from 1 to 12 (inclusive) carbon atoms in it.
  • haloalkyl refers to an alkyl in which one or more hydrogen atoms are replaced by halo, and includes alkyl moieties in which all hydrogens have been replaced by halo (e.g., perfluoroalkyl).
  • arylalkyl or “aralkyl” refer to an alkyl moiety in which an alkyl hydrogen atom is replaced by an aryl group.
  • Aralkyl includes groups in which more than one hydrogen atom has been replaced by an aryl group.
  • arylalkyl or “aralkyl” include benzyl, 2-phenylethyl, 3-phenylpropyl, 9-fluorenyl, benzhydryl, and trityl groups.
  • alkylene refers to a divalent alkyl, e.g., -CH 2 -, -CH 2 CH 2 -, and -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 -.
  • alkenyl refers to a straight or branched hydrocarbon chain containing 2-12 carbon atoms and having one or more double bonds.
  • alkenyl groups include, but are not limited to, allyl, propenyl, 2-butenyl, 3-hexenyl and 3-octenyl groups.
  • One of the double bond carbons may optionally be the point of attachment of the alkenyl substituent.
  • alkynyl refers to a straight or branched hydrocarbon chain containing 2-12 carbon atoms and characterized in having one or more triple bonds. Examples of alkynyl groups include, but are not limited to, ethynyl, propargyl, and 3-hexynyl.
  • One of the triple bond carbons may optionally be the point of attachment of the alkynyl substituent.
  • alkylamino and dialkylamino refer to -NH(alkyl) and -NH(alkyl) 2 radicals respectively.
  • aralkylamino refers to a -NH(aralkyl) radical.
  • alkylaminoalkyl refers to a (alkyl)NH-alkyl- radical; the term dialkylaminoalkyl refers to a (alkyl) 2 N-alkyl- radical
  • alkoxy refers to an -O-alkyl radical.
  • mercapto refers to an SH radical.
  • thioalkoxy refers to an -S-alkyl radical.
  • thioaryloxy refers to an -S-aryl radical.
  • aryl refers to an aromatic monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic hydrocarbon ring system, wherein any ring atom capable of substitution can be substituted by a substituent.
  • aryl moieties include, but are not limited to, phenyl, naphthyl, and anthracenyl.
  • cycloalkyl as employed herein includes saturated cyclic, bicyclic, tricyclic,or polycyclic hydrocarbon groups having 3 to 12 carbons. Any ring atom can be substituted.
  • the cycloalkyl groups can contain fused rings. Fused rings are rings that share a common carbon atom. Examples of cycloalkyl moieties include, but are not limited to, cyclopropyl, cyclohexyl, methylcyclohexyl, adamantyl, and norbornyl.
  • heterocyclyl refers to a nonaromatic 3-10 membered monocyclic, 8-12 membered bicyclic, or 11-14 membered tricyclic ring system having 1-3 heteroatoms if monocyclic, 1-6 heteroatoms if bicyclic, or 1-9 heteroatoms if tricyclic, said heteroatoms selected from O, N, or S (e.g., carbon atoms arid ⁇ -3, ' 1-6, or r-9 "' heteroaToms ' ofN,'0, or S if monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic, respectively).
  • the heteroatom may optionally be the point of attachment of the heterocyclyl substituent. Any ring atom can be substituted.
  • heterocyclyl groups can contain fused rings. Fused rings are rings that share a common carbon atom.
  • heterocyclyl include, but are not limited to, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydropyranyl, piperidinyl, mo ⁇ holino, pyrrolinyl, pyrimidinyl, quinolinyl, and pyrrolidinyl.
  • cycloalkenyl refers to partially unsaturated, nonaromatic, cyclic, bicyclic, tricyclic, or polycyclic hydrocarbon groups having 5 to 12 carbons, preferably 5 to 8 carbons.
  • the unsaturated carbon may optionally be the point of attachment of the cycloalkenyl substituent. Any ring atom can be substituted.
  • the cycloalkenyl groups can contain fused rings. Fused rings are rings that share a common carbon atom. Examples of cycloalkenyl moieties include, but are not limited to, cyclohexenyl, cyclohexadienyl, or norbornenyl.
  • heterocycloalkenyl refers to a partially saturated, nonaromatic 5-10 membered monocyclic, 8-12 membered bicyclic, or 11-14 membered tricyclic ring system having 1-3 heteroatoms if monocyclic, 1-6 heteroatoms if bicyclic, or 1-9 heteroatoms if tricyclic, said heteroatoms selected from O, N, or S (e.g., carbon atoms and 1-3, 1-6, or 1-9 heteroatoms of N, O, or S if monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic, respectively).
  • the unsaturated carbon or the heteroatom may optionally be the point of attachment of the heterocycloalkenyl substituent. Any ring atom can be substituted.
  • heterocycloalkenyl groups can contain fused rings. Fused rings are rings that share a common carbon atom. Examples of heterocycloalkenyl include but are not limited to tetrahydropyridyl and dihydropyranyl. ,
  • heteroaryl refers to an aromatic 5-8 membered monocyclic, 8-12 membered bicyclic, or 11-14 membered tricyclic ring system having 1-3 heteroatoms if monocyclic, 1-6 heteroatoms if bicyclic, or 1-9 heteroatoms if tricyclic, said heteroatoms selected from O, N, or S (e.g., carbon atoms and 1-3, 1-6, or 1-9 heteroatoms of N, O, or S if monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic, respectively). Any ring atom can be substituted.
  • oxo refers to an oxygen atom, which forms a carbonyl when attached to carbon, an N- oxide when attached to nitrogen, and a sulfoxide or sulfone when attached to sulfur.
  • acyl refers to an alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl, heterocyclylcarbonyl, or heteroarylcarbonyl substituent, any of which may be further substituted by substituents.
  • substituted refers to a group “substituted” on an alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heterocyclyl, heterocycloalkenyl, cycloalkenyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group at any atom of that group. Any atom can be substituted.
  • Suitable substituents include, without limitation, alkyl (e.g., Cl, C2, C3, C4, C5, 05, C7,'C8, C9; " CI ' 0, Cli; ' C12 ' stfaTght or branched chain alkyl), cycloalkyl, haloalkyl (e.g., perfluoroalkyl such as CF 3 ), aryl, heteroaryl, aralkyl, heteroaralkyl, heterocyclyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkenyl, heterocycloalkenyl, alkoxy, haloalkoxy (e.g., perfluoroalkoxy such as OCF 3 ), halo, hydroxy, carboxy, carboxylate, cyano, nitro, amino, alkyl amino, S0 3 H, sulfate, phosphate, methylenedioxy (-0- CH 2 -0- wherein oxygens are attached to vic
  • mammal includes organisms, which include mice, rats, gerbils, cows, sheep, pigs, rabbits, goats, horses, monkeys, dogs, cats, and preferably humans.
  • the compounds and methods described herein can be used to treat various fungal mycoses.
  • Mycoses that occur in humans include, without limitation, Actinomycosis, Aspergillosis, Blastomycosis, Candidiasis, Chromomycosis, Coccidioidomycosis, Cryptococcosis, Entomophthoramycosis, Geotrichosis, Histoplasmosis, Mucormycosis, Mycetoma, Nocardiosis, Paracoccidiomycosis, Phaeohyphomycosis, Pneumoscystic pneumonia, Pythiosis, Sporotrichosis, Torulopsosis, Zygomycosis, Chromoblastomycosis, eye infections (e.g., Mycotic keratitis, Endogenous oculomycosis, Extension oculomycosis), Lobomycosis, and Mycetoma.
  • Actinomycosis Aspergillosis, Blastomycosis, Candidias
  • Other syndromes include nail, hair, and skin diseases such as Onychomycosis (Tinea unguium), Piedra, Pityriasis versicolor, Dermatophytosis (e.g., Tinea barbae, Tinea capitis, Tinea co ⁇ oris, Tinea cruris, Tinea favosa, Tinea imbricata, Tinea manuum, Tinea nigra, Tinea pedis, and Tinea unguium), Dermatomycosis, Otomycosis, Phycomycosis, Phaeohyphomycosis, Rhinosporidiosis, and Trichomycosis.
  • Mycoses affecting animals include, without limitation,
  • Factors that can cause a decrease in neutrophil production include, but are not limited to (1) administration of cytotoxic drugs, including alkylating agents such as cyclophosphamide, busulfan, and chlorambucil, and antimetabolites such as methotrexate, 6-mercaptopurine and 5-flurocytosine; (2) administration of other drugs known to inhibit neutrophil production including, but not limited to, certain antibiotics, phenothiazines, diuretics, anti-inflammatory agents, and antithyroid drugs; (3) bacterial sepsis viral ' mfecti hs such " as HiV, EBV or hepatitis; typhoid, malaria, brucellosis, and tularemia; (4) primary hematologic diseases resulting in bone ma ⁇ ow failure, as well as both hereditary syndromes and acquired defects; (5) bone ma ⁇ ow failure due to tumor invasion or myelof ⁇ brosis; and (6) nutritional deficiencies such as deficiency of either vitamin B 12 or folate.
  • Factors that can cause an increase in destruction of neutrophils, thereby rendering an individual susceptible to fungal infections mclude, without limitation, the presence of antineutrophil antibodies, autoimmune disease (such as Felty's syndrome, rheumatoid arthritis, or systemic lupus erythematosis), or idiosyncratic reactions to drugs that, in an idiosyncratic way, act as haptens at the surface of neutrophils, initiating immune destruction of neutrophils.
  • Qualitative defects in neutrophil function that can lead to increased susceptibility to fungal infections include many disease states, for example, leukocyte adhesion deficiency syndromes, neutrophil chemotactic defects, and neutrophil phagocytic and killing defects.
  • Neutrophil function is also compromised by administration of corticosteroids used in the treatment of a wide variety of diseases. Thus, patients treated with corticosteroids are at increased risk of fungal infections .
  • Additional factors increasing individual susceptibility to fungal infections include: (1) treatment with broad spectrum antibiotics, especially in the hospital setting and in Intensive Care settings in particular; (2) application of intravenous catheters, particularly central venous catheters;(3) surgical wounds, particularly those associated with intra-abdo inal surgeries; (4) bone ma ⁇ ow or solid organ transplantation; (5) cancer chemotherapy; (6) Acquired Immune Deficiency Syndrome; (7) Intensive Care Unit stay; and (8) diabetes.
  • neonates and aged patients are at increased risk.
  • the compounds described herein can be used alone or in combination with other antimicrobial compounds, including conventional antimicrobial agents such as known antifungal agents for therapeutic or prophylactic treatment of infection or potential infection.
  • useful antifungal compounds include fungicidal (e.g., Amphotericin) and fungistatic (e.g., Fluconazole) compounds. Whether a given agent is fungicidal or fungistatic can be dependent on the fungal species and other factors such as whether activity is measured in vitro or in vivo.
  • Combination therapies are particularly useful for treatment of infections that respond poorly to single agent therapy and are also useful in the treatment of infections by organisms that exhibit resistance, e.g., acquired or intrinsic resistance, to one or more antifungal agents.
  • combination therapies can be useful for treatment of infection by an organism that exhibits resistance due to either genetic changes or physiological conditions.
  • Combination therapies are also useful in situations where an effective dose of one or more of the agents used in the combination therapy is associated with undesirable toxicity or side effects when not used in combination. This is because a combination therapy can be used to reduce the required dosage or duration of administration of the individual agents.
  • Ivioreoverj t ie lower dosages ' oHen used in a combination therapy may reduce the incidence of acquired resistance to one or more of the agents used in the combination therapy.
  • the individual agents used in combination can act by reducing the growth, replication, viability, invasiveness or virulence of a microbe.
  • one or more of the individual agents can act by simply reducing the resistance (or increasing the sensitivity) of the microbe to one or more other agents used in the combination.
  • agents that can be used in combination therapy are polyenes (e.g., Amphotericin B, Mepartricin, Nystatin, Pimaricin, SPA-S-843), candins (e.g., Anidulafungin, Caspofungin, Micofungin, and Cilofungin, V-echinocandin), aminocandins, sordarins (e.g., Azasordarin, GM 222712, GM 237354), azoles (e.g., Azoline, Albaconazole, bal 8557, Bifonazole, Butoconazole, Clotrimazole, Croconazole, CS- 758, Eberconazole, Econazole, Fenticonazole, Fluconazole, Flutrimazole, Fosfluconazole, Isoconazole, Itraconazole, Ketoconazole, Ianoconazole, Miconazole, Neticonazole, Oxiconazole, poly
  • the antifungal agent can act, for example, by blocking ergosterol synthesis (e.g., azoles or allylamines), by interfering with the cell wall (e.g., candins), by interfering with the cell membrane (polyenes) or by interfering with protein translation (e.g., sordarins).
  • ergosterol synthesis e.g., azoles or allylamines
  • cell wall e.g., candins
  • polyenes cell membrane
  • protein translation e.g., sordarins
  • Combination therapy can be achieved by administering two or more agents, each of which is formulated and administered separately, or by administering two or more agents in a single formulation.
  • Other combinations are also encompassed by combination therapy.
  • two agents can be formulated together and administered in conjunction with a separate formulation containing a third agent. While the two or more agents in the combination therapy can be administered simultaneously, they need not be.
  • administration of a first agent (or combination of agents) can precede administration of a second agent (or combination of agents) by minutes, hours, days, or weeks.
  • the two or more agents can be administered within minutes of each other or within 1, 2, 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, or 24 hours of each other or within 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 14 days of each other or within 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 weeks of each other. In some cases even longer intervals are possible. While in many cases it is desirable that the two or more agents used in a combination therapy be present in within the patient's body at the same time, this need not be so.
  • Combination therapy ' can also include two or more administrations of one or more of the agents used in the combination.
  • agent X and agent Y are used in a combination, one could administer them sequentially in any combination one or more times, e.g., in the order X-Y-X, X-X-Y, Y- X-Y, Y-Y-X, X-X-Y-Y, etc.
  • the antifungal agents can be combined with any pharmaceutically acceptable ca ⁇ ier or medium. Thus, they can be combined with materials that do not produce an adverse, allergic or otherwise unwanted reaction when administered to a patient.
  • the carriers or mediums used can include solvents, dispersants, coatings, abso ⁇ tion promoting agents, controlled release agents, and one or more inert excipients (which include starches, polyols, granulating agents, microcrystalline cellulose, diluents, 0 lubricants, binders, disintegrating agents, and the like), etc. If desired, tablet dosages of the disclosed compositions may be coated by standard aqueous or nonaqueous techniques.
  • compositions of the present invention may also optionally include other therapeutic ingredients, anti-caking agents, preservatives, sweetening agents, colorants, flavors, desiccants, plasticizers, dyes, and the like. Any such optional ingredient must be compatible with the compound of the invention to insure 5 the stability of the formulation.
  • the composition may contain other additives as needed, including for exanple lactose, glucose, fructose, galactose, trehalose, sucrose, maltose, raffinose, maltitol, melezitose, stachyose, lactitol, palatinite, starch, xylitol, mannitol, myoinositol, and the like, and hydrates thereof, and amino acids, for example alanine, glycine and betaine, and peptides and proteins, for example albumen.
  • additives including for exanple lactose, glucose, fructose, galactose, trehalose, sucrose, maltose, raffinose, maltitol, melezitose, stachyose, lactitol, palatinite, starch, xylitol, mannitol, myoinositol, and the like, and hydrates
  • excipients for use as the pharmaceutically acceptable carriers and. the pharmaceutically acceptable inert carriers and the aforementioned additional ingredients include, but are not limited to binders, fillers, disintegrants, lubricants, anti-microbial agents, and coating agents such as:
  • BINDERS corn starch, potato starch, other starches, gelatin, natural and synthetic gums such as !5 acacia, sodium alginate, alginic acid, other alginates, powdered tragacanth, guar gum, cellulose and its derivatives (e.g., ethyl cellulose, cellulose acetate, carboxymethyl cellulose calcium, sodium carboxymethyl cellulose), polyvinyl py ⁇ olidone, methyl cellulose, pre-gelatinized starch (e.g., STARCH 1500® and STARCH 1500 LM®, sold by Colorcon, Ltd.), hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose, microcrystalline cellulose (e.g. AVICELTM, such as, AVICEL-PH-101TM, -103TM and -105TM, sold by D FMC Co ⁇ oration, Marcus Hook, PA, USA), or mixtures thereof,
  • AVICELTM such as, AVICEL-PH-101TM, -103TM and -105TM
  • FILLERS talc, calcium carbonate (e.g., granules or powder), dibasic calcium phosphate, tribasic calcium phosphate, calcium sulfate (e.g., granules or powder), microcrystalline cellulose, powdered "cellulose, dexfrates, kaolm TM ma ⁇ t ⁇ l, silicic acid, sorbitol, starch, pre-gelatinized starch, or mixtures thereof,
  • DISINTEGRANTS agar-agar, alginic acid, calcium carbonate, microcrystalline cellulose, croscarmellose sodium, crospovidone, polacrilin potassium, sodium starch glycolate, potato or tapioca starch, other starches, pre-gelatinized starch, clays, other algins, other celluloses, gums, or mixtures thereof,
  • LUBRICANTS calcium stearate, magnesium stearate, mineral oil, light mineral oil, glycerin, sorbitol, mannitol, polyethylene glycol, other glycols, stearic acid, sodium lauryl sulfate, talc, hydrogenated vegetable oil (e.g., peanut oil, cottonseed oil, sunflower oil, sesame oil, olive oil, corn oil and soybean oil), zinc stearate, ethyl oleate, ethyl laurate, agar, syloid silica gel (AEROSIL 200, W.R.
  • AEROSIL 200 ethyl oleate
  • W.R syloid silica gel
  • ANTI-CAKING AGENTS calcium silicate, magnesium silicate, silicon dioxide, colloidal silicon dioxide, talc, or mixtures thereof,
  • ANTIMICROBIAL AGENTS benzalkonium chloride, benzethonium chloride, benzoic acid, benzyl alcohol, butyl paraben, cetylpyridinium chloride, cresol, chlorobutanol, dehydroacetic acid, ethylparaben, methylparaben, phenol, phenylethyl alcohol, phenoxyethanol, phenylmercuric acetate, phenylmercuric nitrate, potassium sorbate, propylparaben, sodium benzoate, sodium dehydroacetate, sodium propionate, sorbic acid, thimersol, thymo, or mixtures thereof, and COATING AGENTS: sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, cellulose acetate phthalate, ethylcellulose, gelatin, pharmaceutical glaze, hydroxypropyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose phthalate, methylcellulose, polyethylene glycol, poly
  • Antifungal agents can be administered, e.g., by intravenous injection, intramuscular injection, subcutaneous injection, or by other routes. They can be injected or otherwise introduced (e.g., via catheter or direct placement) at a site of infection or potential injection.
  • the agents can be administered orally, e.g., as a tablet or cachet containing a predetermined amount of the active ingredient, pellet, gel, paste, syrup, bolus, electuary, slurry, capsule; powder; granules; as a solution or a suspension in an aqueous liquid or a non-aqueous liquid; as an oil-in-water liquid emulsion or a water-in-oil liquid emulsion, via a liposomal formulation (see, e.g., EP 736299) or in some other form.
  • Orally administered compositions can include binders, flavoring agents, and humectants.
  • the agents can be included in dentifrices or oral washes.
  • oral formulations can include abrasives and foaming agents.
  • the agents can also be administered transdermally, parenterally, or in the form a suppository. They can also be administered in eyedrops.
  • Antifungal agents can " be"a"ffee acid or base, or a pharmacologically acceptable salt thereof. Solids can be dissolved or dispersed immediately prior to administration or earlier. In some circumstances the preparations include a preservative to prevent the growth of microorganisms.
  • the pharmaceutical forms suitable for injection can include sterile aqueous or organic solutions or dispersions which include, e.g., water, an alcohol, an organic solvent, an oil or other solvent or dispersant (e.g., glycerol, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol, and vegetable oils).
  • the formulations may contain antioxidants, buffers, bacteriostats, and solutes that render the formulation isotonic with the blood of the intended recipient, and aqueous and non-aqueous sterile suspensions that can include suspending agents, solubilizers, thickening agents, stabilizers, and preservatives.
  • Pharmaceutical agents can be sterilized by filter sterilization or by other suitable means.
  • the agents either in their free form or as a salt can be combined with a polymer such as polylactic-glycoloic acid (PLGA), ⁇ oly-(I)-lactic-glycolic-tartaric acid (P(l)LGT) (WO 01/12233), polyglycolic acid (U.S. 3,773,919), polylactic acid (U.S.4,767,628), poly( ⁇ -caprolactone) and poly(alkylene oxide) (U.S. 20030068384) to create a sustained release formulation.
  • PLGA polylactic-glycoloic acid
  • P(l)LGT) ⁇ oly-(I)-lactic-glycolic-tartaric acid
  • P(l)LGT) WO 01/12233
  • polyglycolic acid U.S. 3,773,919
  • polylactic acid U.S.4,767,628)
  • poly( ⁇ -caprolactone) poly(alkylene oxide)
  • Such formulations can be used to implants that release a compound of the invention or another agent over a period of a few days, a few weeks or several months depending on the polymer, the particle size of the polymer, and the size of the implant (see, e.g., U.S. 6,620,422).
  • Other sustained release formulations are described in EP 0 467 389 A2, WO 93/241150, U.S. 5,612,052, WO 97/40085, WO 03/075887, WO 01/01964A2, U.S. 5,922,356, WO 94/155587, WO 02/074247A2, WO 98/25642, U.S. 5,968,895, U.S. 6,180,608, U.S.
  • WO 94/06452 describe a sustained release formulation providing either polyethylene glycols (where PEG 300 and PEG 400 are most prefe ⁇ ed) or triacetin.
  • WO 03/053401 describes a formulation which may both enhance bioavailability and provide controlled release of the agent within the GI tract. Additional controlled release formulations are described in WO 02/38129, EP 326 151, U.S. 5,236,704, WO 02/30398, WO 98/13029; U.S. 20030064105, U.S. 20030138488A1, U.S. 20030216307A1 J.S. 6,667,060, WO 01/49249, WO 01/49311, WO 01/49249, WO 01/49311, and U.S. 5,877,224.
  • the agents can be administered, e.g., by intravenous injection, intramuscular injection, subcutaneous injection, intraperitoneal injection, topical, sublingual, intraarticular (in the joints), intradermal, buccal, ophthalmic (including intraocular), intranasaly (including using a cannula), or by other routes.
  • the agents can be administered orally, e.g., as a tablet or cachet containing a predetermined amount of the active ingredient, gel, pellet, paste, syrup, bolus, electuary, slurry, capsule, powder, granules, as a solution or a suspension in an aqueous liquid or a non-aqueous liquid, as an oil-in-water liquiff emulsion or a wafer- - ⁇ rHq ⁇ SS emulsion, via a micellar formulation (see, e.g.
  • Orally administered compositions can include binders, lubricants, inert diluents, lubricating, surface active or dispersing agents, flavoring agents, and humectants.
  • Orally administered formulations such as tablets may optionally be coated or scored and may be formulated so as to provide sustained, delayed or controlled release of the active ingredient therein.
  • the agents can also be administered transdermally (i.e.
  • the agents can be administered using high-velocity transdermal particle injection techniques using the hydrogel particle formulation described in U.S. 20020061336. Additional particle formulations are described in WO 00/45792, WO 00/53160, and WO 02/19989. An example of a transdermal formulation containing plaster and the abso ⁇ tion promoter dimethylisosorbide can be found in WO 89/04179.
  • WO 96/11705 provides formulations suitable for transdermal adminisitration.
  • the agents can be administered in the form a suppository or by other vaginal or rectal means.
  • the agents can be administered in a transmembrane formulation as described in WO 90/07923.
  • the agents can be administed non-invasively via the dehydrated particicles described in U.S. 6,485,706.
  • the agent can be administered in an enteric-coated drug formulation as described in WO 02/49621.
  • the agents can be administered intranassaly using the formulation described in U.S. 5,179,079.
  • Formulations suitable for parenteral injection are described in WO 00/62759.
  • the agents can be administered using the casein formulation described in U. S. 20030206939 and WO 00/06108.
  • the agents can be administered using the particulate formulations described in U.S. 20020034536.
  • the agents can be administered by pulmonary route utilizing several techniques including but not limited to intratracheal instillation (delivery of solution into the lungs by syringe), intratracheal delivery of liposomes, insufflation
  • Aerosols e.g., jet or ultrasonic nebulizers, metered-dose inhalers (MDIs), and dry-powder inhalers (DPIs)
  • MDIs metered-dose inhalers
  • DPIs dry-powder inhalers
  • Aerosol formulations are stable dispersions or suspensions of solid material and liquid droplets in a gaseous medium and can be placed into pressurized acceptable propellants, such as hydrofluroalkanes (HFAs, i.e.
  • HFAs hydrofluroalkanes
  • Pulmonary formulations may include permeation enhancers such as fatty acids, and saccharides, chelating agents, enzyme inhibitors (e.g., protease inhibitors), adjuvants (e.g., glycocholate, surfactin, span 85, and nafamostat), preservatives (e.g., benzalkonium chloride or chlorobutanol), and ethanol (normally up to 5% but possibly up to 20%, by weight).
  • permeation enhancers such as fatty acids, and saccharides, chelating agents, enzyme inhibitors (e.g., protease inhibitors), adjuvants (e.g., glycocholate, surfactin, span 85, and nafamostat), preservatives (e.g., benzalkonium chloride or chlorobutanol), and ethanol (normally up to 5% but possibly up to 20%, by weight).
  • Pulmonary formulations may "also include surfactants which mclude but are not limited to bile salts and those described in U.S. 6,524,557 and references therein.
  • the surfactants described in U.S. 6,524,557 e.g., a C8-C16 fatty acid salt, a bile salt, a phospholipid, or alkyl saccaride are advantageous in that some of them also reportedly enhance abso ⁇ tion of the peptide in the formulation.
  • dry powder formulations comprising a therapeutically effective amount of active compound blended with an appropriate carrier and adapted for use in connection with a dry-powder inhaler.
  • Abso ⁇ tion enhancers which can be added to dry powder formulations of the present invention include those described in U.S. 6,632,456.
  • WO 02/080884 describes new methods for the surface modification of powders. Aerosol formulations may include U.S. 5,230,884, U.S. 5,292,499, WO 017/8694, WO 01/78696, U.S. 2003019437, U. S. 20030165436, and WO 96/40089 (which includes vegetable oil).
  • Sustained release formulations suitable for inhalation are described in U.S.
  • Solutions of medicament in buffered saline and similar vehicles are commonly employed to generate an aerosol in a nebulizer.
  • Simple nebulizers operate on Bernoulli's principle and employ a stream of air or oxygen to generate the spray particles.
  • More complex nebulizers employ ultrasound to create the spray particles. Both types are well known in the art and are described in standard textbooks of pharmacy such as Sprowls' American Pharmacy and Remington's The Science and Practice of Pharmacy.
  • Other devices for generating aerosols employ compressed gases, usually hydrofluorocarbons and chlorofluorocarbons, which are mixed with the medicament and any necessary excipients in a pressurized container, these devices are likewise described in standard textbooks such as Sprowls and Remington.
  • the agent can be fused to immunoglobulins or albumin, or inco ⁇ orated into a lipsome to improve half-life.
  • the agent can also be conjugated to polyethylene glycol (PEG) chains.
  • PEG polyethylene glycol
  • Methods for pegylation and additional formulations containing PEG-conjugates i.e. PEG-based hydrogels, PEG modified liposomes
  • PEG-conjugates i.e. PEG-based hydrogels, PEG modified liposomes
  • the agent can be administered via a nanocochleate or cochleate delivery vehicle (BioDelivery Sciences International).
  • the agents can be delivered transmucosally (i.e.
  • the agents can be formulated in microcapsules as described in WO 88/01165.
  • the agent can be administered intra-orally using the formulations described in U.S. 20020055496, WO 00/47203, and U.S. 6,495,120.
  • the agent can be delivered using nanoemulsion formulations described in WO 01/91728A2.
  • Suitable pharmaceutical compositions in accordance with the invention will generally include an amount of the active compound(s) with an acceptable pharmaceutical diluent or excipient, such as a sterile aqueous solution, to give a range of final concentrations, depending on the intended use.
  • an acceptable pharmaceutical diluent or excipient such as a sterile aqueous solution.
  • the techniques of preparation are generally well known in the art, as exemplified by Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th Ed., Mack Publishing Company, 1995.
  • a prophylactically effective amount of a compound is an amount that, in a given dosage regime, reduces the frequency or severity of infection by a fungal pathogen compared to treatment with a placebo.
  • a therapeutically effective amount of a compound is an amount that, in a given dosage regime, results in improved therapeutic outcome (e.g., reduces manifestations or impact of infection).
  • a therapeutically effective amount is one which results in improved therapeutic outcome compared to one agent used alone.
  • a therapeutically effective amount may also reduce the fungal bioburden within a patient and/or reduces the time to reduce the fungal bioburden to a lower level compared to treatment with a placebo and/or improves therapeutic outcome.
  • fungal bioburden is meant the number of fungal cells or spores per unit of sample (e.g., the number of cells or spores per gram of tissue).
  • the number of cells can be determined by methods including, but not limited to, calculation of fungal biomass, PCR signal with fungal-specific primers, hybridization, histologic examination, detection of fungal metabolites or products, and plating for colony forming units. Specific methods can be more or less applicable depending on the " characteristics of the organism and the treatment.
  • Improved therapeutic outcome can be assessed by a variety of measures including increased survival rate, reduced percentage of culture-positive body fluid samples (e.g., blood, urine, sputum), reduced rate of x-ray findings consistent with infection (e.g., chest x-ray, body CT scan), and reduced number of days with fever.
  • Therapeutically effective doses can be determined using an animal model or via clinical studies. Experimental animals suffering from a microbial infection are often used to determine an initial therapeutic regime that can be further verified in human clinical trials according to standard testing methods. The activity of compounds in vivo and the likely useful dosage for human patients can be determined using various animal models including those that are described by Abruzzo et al. (Antimicrobial Agents and Chemotherapy 44:2310 (2000)); Bowan et al.
  • the agents described herein and combination therapy agents can be packaged as a kit that includes single or multiple doses of two or more agents, each packaged or formulated individually, or single or multiple doses of two or more agents packaged or formulated in combination.
  • one or more agents can be present in first container, and the kit can optionally include one or more agents in a second container.
  • the container or containers are placed within a package, and the package can optionally include administration or dosage instructions.
  • a kit can include additional components such as syringes or other means for administering the agents as well as diluents or other means for formulation.
  • compositions or agents identified using the methods disclosed herein may be used as chemicals applied as sprays or dusts on the foliage of plants, or in irrigation systems.
  • such agents are to be administered on the surface of the plant in advance of the pathogen in order to prevent infection.
  • Seeds, bulbs, roots, tubers, and corms are also treated to prevent pathogenic attack after planting by controlling pathogens carried on them or existing in the soil at the planting site.
  • Soil to be planted with vegetables, ornamentals, shrubs, or trees can also be treated for control of a variety of microbial pathogens. Treatment is preferably done several days or weeks before planting.
  • the chemicals can be applied by either a mechanized route, e.g., a tractor, or with hand applications.
  • chemicals identified using the methods of the assay can be used as disinfectants.
  • the compounds described herein can be coated onto or integrated into materials used to make catheters, including but not limited to intravenous, urinary, intraperitoneal, ventricular, spinal and surgical drainage catheters, and other medical devices in order to prevent colonization and systemic seeding by potential pathogens.
  • the compounds described herein may be coated onto or integrated into materials that constitute various surgical prostheses and to dentures to prevent colonization by pathogens and thereby prevent more serious invasive infection or systemic seeding by pathogens. It wiirbe recognized ' that "the compounds of this invention can exist in radiolabeled form, i.e., the compounds may contain one or more atoms containing an atomic mass or mass number different from the atomic mass or mass number usually found in nature.
  • Radioisotopes of hydrogen, carbon, phosphorous, fluorine, iodine and chlorine include 3 H, 1 C, 35 S, 32 P, 18 F, 125 I and 36 C1, respectively.
  • Compounds that contain those radioisotopes and/or other radioisotopes of other atoms are within the scope of this invention.
  • Tritiated, i.e. 3 H, and carbon-14, i.e., 1 C, radioisotopes are particularly prefe ⁇ ed for their ease in preparation and detectability.
  • Radiolabeled compounds of this invention and prodrugs thereof can generally be prepared by methods well known to those skilled in the art. Conveniently, such radiolabeled compounds can be prepared by carrying out the procedures disclosed in the Examples and Schemes by substituting a readily available radiolabeled reagent for a non-radiolabeled reagent.
  • FIG. 1A is a table of representative compounds and anti-fungal activity data for compounds of formulas (A), (O), (L), (E), (C), (AA), (AB), (K), and (R).
  • FIG. IB is a table of representative compounds and anti-fungal activity data for compounds of formula (AA).
  • FIG. 2 is a summary of representative compounds and anti-fungal activity data for compounds of formulas: (T), ( ⁇ ), (III), (TV), and (V).
  • FIG. 3 is a listing of representative compounds of formula (VI).
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic showing a synthesis of a precursor to compounds having formula H".
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic showing a synthesis of compounds having formula H".
  • FIG. 6 is a table of representative compounds and anti-fungal activity data for compounds of formula (VI).
  • Compounds having formula (A) can include cyclic ("B" is present, dashed lines are bonds) or acyclic (B is absent, dashed lines are unshared electron pairs) compounds.
  • a prefe ⁇ ed subset of formula (A) compounds is represented by formula (A-I).
  • R 4 may be halo, hydroxy, alkoxy, nitro, amino, cyano,carboxy, C ⁇ -C 6 alkyl, C 6 -C ]0 aryl, or 5-8 membered heteroaryl.
  • R e can be C ⁇ -C l2 alkyl, C 7 -C ⁇ 6 aralkyl, C 6 -C ⁇ 0 aryl, or C 6 -C 10 arylamino.
  • Prefe ⁇ ed R e substituents include unbranched C 5 -Cn alkyl, alkoxy-substituted anilino, halo-substituted benzyl, and alkyl-substituted phenyl.
  • R b can be (CH 3 ) 2 NCH 2 CH 2 , benzyl, or branched or unbranched C,-C 6 alkyl.
  • R 9 can be phenyl, preferably substituted with halo and/or alkyl, and n can be 0-2.
  • Compounds having formula (O) may contain a substituted or unsubstituted piperazine core (e.g., with C ⁇ -C 4 alkyl; C ⁇ -C alkoxy; or halo, preferably fluoro).
  • R 1 and R 2 each can be -C ⁇ 2 alkyl; C 7 -Ci6 aralkyl; C 2 -C ⁇ 2 alkenyl, optionally substituted with aryl; C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, optionally substituted with C C 4 alkyl; or R a C(0)-, and all combinations of these substituents are expressly included in this invention.
  • one of R 1 and R 2 can be aralkyl (e.g., benzyl, -(CH 2 ) 2 Ph, or-(CH 2 ) 3 Ph) or alkenyl (e.g., 3-phenylallyl).
  • both of R 1 and R 2 can be aralkyl, and the two aralky groups may be the same or different.
  • one of R 1 and R 2 is aralkyl and the other is alkenyl.
  • Compounds having formula (E) may have substituted or unsubstituted C 7 -C] 6 aralkyl (e.g., benzyl), substituted or unsubstituted C 6 -C 10 aryloxy, or an exocyclic double bond at C-4 of the piperidine ring.
  • the remaining ring carbons may be substituted or unsubstituted (e.g., with C ⁇ -C 4 alkyl; C C alkoxy; or halo, preferably fluoro).
  • R 1 can be C ⁇ -C ⁇ 2 alkyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 substituents; C 7 -Ci 6 aralkyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 substituents; 6-16 membered heteroaralkyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 substituents; C 2 -C ⁇ 2 alkenyl, optionally substituted with 1-2 substituents; C 6 -C ⁇ 0 arylsulfonyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 substituents; -NHC(0)R b ; or C(0)R c .
  • R b can be C 6 -C l0 aryl or 5-8 membered heteroaryl; and R c can be C 6 -C 10 aryl, optionally substituted with C C 4 alkyl.
  • Substituents may be the same or different and may be selected from halo; hydroxy, C C 6 alkyl; - alkoxy; C 6 -C ⁇ 0 aryloxy, optionally substituted with halo; 5-8 membered heteroaryl, optionally substituted " wTthU C 4 " alkyl; C6-C 1 ' o ' airyr, " opti ⁇ ally substituted with C 2 -C 6 dialkylamino or methylenedioxo; C 7 -C 16 aralkoxy; allyloxy; alkylaminocarbonyl; dialkylaminocarbonyl.
  • R 1 substituents include C C 4 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted benzyl, or substituted or unsubstituted 6-membered heteroaralkyl, wherein the substituents are selected from Cj-C 2 alkoxy, benzyloxy, allyloxy, F, Br, (CH 3 ) 2 N, CH 3 , methylenedioxo, or (CH 3 ) 2 CHNHC(0)-.
  • the remaining ring carbons may be substituted or unsubstituted (e.g., with C C 4 alkyl; C C 4 alkoxy; or halo, preferably fluoro).
  • R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , and R 4 may be halo, hydroxy, alkoxy, nitro, amino, cyano, carboxy, - alkyl, C 6 -C ⁇ 0 aryl, or 5-8 membered heteroaryl.
  • R 5 can be hydrogen, optionally substituted aryl sulfonyl (e.g., p-toly ⁇ ), C ⁇ -C 6 alkyl, or C ⁇ -C 6 alkoxycarbonyl.
  • R 6 can be hydrogen; C C 6 alkylamino, optionally substituted with 1-3 substituents; C 6 - C 10 aryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 substituents; or C5-C 10 heteroaryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 substituents. Substituents may be the same or different and may include halo; methylenedioxo; C 6 -C ⁇ 0 aryloxy, optionally substituted with halo; or C ⁇ -C 4 alkoxy.
  • R 7 can be hydrogen; C 7 -C l6 aralkyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 -C 4 alkyl or C C 4 alkoxy; or -C(0)R d .
  • R d can be C 6 -C ⁇ 0 aryl, optionally substituted with halo or C C 4 alkyl; 5-8 membered heteroaryl; 3-8 membered heterocyclyl; or 5-10 membered heterocycloalkenyl.
  • R 6 and R 7 together are 3-8 membered heterocyclyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 substituents, which may be the same or different and may include hydroxy, oxo, or C C 6 alkyl.
  • Compounds having formula (AA) may contain a phenyl or thienyl ring fused to the pyrimidine ring.
  • the fused phenyl or thienyl ring may be optionally substituted with 1-3 substituents, which may be the same or different and include halo, C ⁇ -C 6 alkyl, fused C 5 -C 7 cycloalkyl, or C 6 -C ⁇ 0 aryl.
  • A can be halo; -NHR 3 ; -OR 4 ; or C 3 -C 8 heteroaryl, optionally substituted with substituted C 6 arylsulfonyl, preferably A is NR 3 .
  • R 3 and R 4 each can be Cj-C 12 alkyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 substituents or C 7 -C ⁇ 6 aralkyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 substituents.
  • Substituents may be the same or different and may include halo, C ⁇ -C 4 alkoxy (e.g, OCH 3 ), methylenedioxo, or dialkylamino (e.g, dimethylamino).
  • Compounds of formula (AB) may have one of the piperazine nitrogens attached to a 6-10 membered heteroaryl (pyridine, pyrimidine, quinoline, etc.). Any one of the ring atoms of the 6-10 membered heteroaryl may be the point of attachment.
  • the heteroaryl group may be substituted with 1-3 substituents, which may be the same or different and include , halo; C 6 -C ⁇ o aryl, optionally substituted with halo, hydroxy, or -C 4 alkoxy; C C 4 alkoxycarbonyl; or C ⁇ -C 4 alkyl.
  • the other piperazine nitrogen may be unsubstituted or substituted with C 6 -C j0 arylsulfonyl, optionally substituted with halo; C]-C l2 alkyl; -C(0)R b ;or C 7 -C 16 aralkyl.
  • R b can be NHR C ; 5-10 membered heteroaryl; or C 6 -C l0 aryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 C,-C 4 alkoxy.
  • R c can be C 6 -C ]0 aryl and may contain 1-3 halo.
  • Compounds having formula (K) contain an amino substituent at C-4 of the piperidine ring.
  • the remaining ring carbons may be substituted or unsubstituted (e.g, with C C 4 alkyl; C C 4 alkoxy; -C 4 alkoxycarbonyl; or halo, prefereably fluoro).
  • R 1 can be C C ⁇ 2 alkyl, C 7 -C l6 aralkyl, or -C(0)R a ;
  • R a can be C ⁇ -C 6 alkyl or C ⁇ -C alkoxy.
  • R 1 is C C 5 alkyl (e.g, methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl or isobutyl) or C 7 -C 8 aralkyl (e.g, benzyl or 2-phenylethyl).
  • R 2 and R 2' can each be hydrogen; - alkyl; C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl; -C(0)R b ; substituted or unsubstituted C 7 -C ]6 aralkyl; or substituted or unsubstituted 6- 16 membered heteroaralkyl; R b can be substituted or unsubstituted aryl.
  • R 2 and R 2' together are 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, optionally substituted with 1-5 C,-C 4 alkyl.
  • Substitutents may be the same or different and may include C 6 -C l0 aryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 R d ; C 6 -C, 0 aryloxy, optionally substituted with 1-3 R d ; C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl -C ⁇ -C alkoxy; C 6 -C ⁇ 0 arylamino, optionally substituted with 1-3 R d ; C 6 -C l0 thioaryloxy, optionally substituted with 1-3 R d ; or C7-C 16 aralkoxy, optionally substituted with 1-3 R d ; each R d is, independently, halo, C ⁇ -C 6 alkyl, C ⁇ -C 4 alkoxy,
  • R 1 can be hydrogen, C C 6 alkyl, C 2 -C 6 alkenyl, or C 7 -C ⁇ 6 aralkoxy; preferably R 1 is ethyl or vinyl.
  • R 2 and R 2 can each be hydrogen or CHR 3 R 4 .
  • the carbon to which R 3 and R 4 is attached is a stereogenic carbon and may have either the R or the S configuration.
  • R 3 can be C 5 -C l4 heteroaryl, optionally substituted with - alkoxy;
  • R 4 can be OR 5 ; and
  • R 5 can be hydrogen, C 6 -C aryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 substituents; -C(0)R b ; 6-14 membered heteroaryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 substituents; C 7 -C l6 aralkyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 substituents;
  • R b can be C 6 -C ⁇ 0 aryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 substituents; or 5-10 membered heteroaryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 substituents.
  • Substituents may be the same or different and may include halo, - alkyl, or C,-C 4 alkoxy.
  • stable refers to compounds which possess stability sufficient to allow manufacture and which maintains the integrity of the compound for a sufficient period of time to be useful for the pu ⁇ oses detailed herein (e.g, therapeutic or prophylactic administration to a subject).
  • Compounds mat can oe userui m treating fungal infection can be identified through both in vitro (cell and non-cell based) and in vivo methods, for example, the method described below in Example 2
  • the compounds described herein can be obtained from commercial sources (e.g. Specs Biospecs, Chembridge, InterBioscreen, Maybridge, TimTec, Comgenex) or synthesized by conventional methods as shown below using commercially available starting materials and reagents.
  • compounds having formula (K) can be synthesized via reductive alkylation as shown in Scheme 1 below.
  • the compounds described herein can be separated from a reaction mixture and further purified by a method such as column chromatography, high-pressure liquid chromatography, or recrystallization. As can be appreciated by the skilled artisan, further methods of synthesizing the compounds of the formulae herein will be evident to those of ordinary skill in the art. Additionally, the various synthetic steps may be performed in an alternate sequence or order to give the desired compounds. Synthetic chemistry transformations and protecting group methodologies (protection and deprotection) useful in synthesizing the compounds described herein are known in the art and include, for example, those such as described in R. Larock, Comprehensive Organic Transformations, VCH Publishers (1989); T.W. Greene and P.G.M.
  • the compounds of this invention may contain one or more asymmetric centers and thus occur as racemates and racemic mixtures, single enantiomers, individual diastereomers and diastereomeric mixtures. All such isomeric forms of these compounds are expressly included in the present invention.
  • the compounds of this invention may also contain linkages (e.g, carbon-carbon bonds) wherein bond rotation is restricted about that particular linkage, e.g. restriction resulting from the presence of a ring or double bond. Accordingly, all cis/trans and E/Z isomers are expressly included in the present invention.
  • the compounds of this invention may also be represented in multiple tautomeric forms, in such instances; the invention expressly includes all tautomeric forms of the compounds described herein, even though only a single tautomeric form may be represented (e.g, alkylation of a ring system may result in alkylation at multiple sites, the invention expressly includes all such reaction products). All such isomeric forms of such compounds are expressly included in the present invention. All crystal forms of the compounds described herein are expressly included in the present invention.
  • the compounds of this invention include the compounds themselves, as well as their salts and their prodrugs, if applicable.
  • a salt for example, can be formed between an anion and a positively charged substituent (e.g, amino) on a compound described herein. Suitable anions include chloride, bromide, iodide, sulfate, nitrate, phosphate, citrate, methanesulfonate, trifluoroacetate, and acetate.
  • a salt can also be formed between a cation and a negatively charged substituent (e.g, carboxylate) on a compound described herein.
  • Suitable cations include sodium ion, potassium ion, magnesium ion, calcium ion, and an ammonium cation such as tetramethylammonium ion.
  • Examples of prodrugs include esters and other pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives, which, upon administration to a subject, are capable of providing active compounds.
  • the compounds of this invention may be modified by appending appropriate functionalities to enhance selected biological properties.
  • modifications are known in the art and include those which increase biological penetration into a given biological compartment (e.g, blood, lymphatic system, central nervous system), increase oral availability, increase solubility to allow administration by injection, alter metabolism and alter rate of excretion.
  • FIG. 1A Depicted in FIG. 1A are examples of several compounds having formula A, several compound having formula O, several compounds having formula L, several compounds having formula C, several compounds having formula AA, several compounds having formula AB, several compounds having formula R, and several compound having formula K.
  • the various compounds are inhibitors of fungal invasion.
  • the activity of the compounds in various assays of fungal invasion and mammalian cell toxicity was measured as described below in Example 2 and the results are presented in FIG. 1 A. Thus, results are reported for the following tests: C. albicans HWPl-lacZ Reporter logarithmic phase growth invasion assay (column 2), C. albicans HWPl-lacZ Reporter stationary phase growth invasion assay
  • FIG. IB depicts additional compounds within formula (AA). The structure of each compound is shown in the first column and the activity of the compound in the C. albicans HWPl-lacZ Reporter logarithmic phase growth invasion assay is shown in the second column.
  • l-Methyl-4-(methylamino)piperidine 500 mg, 3.90mmol, 1.2 eq. was dissolved in acetonitrile (5 mL). To the resulting solution was added glacial acetic acid (1.94 mL, 32.5 mmol, lOeq.) followed by 3-(3,4-dichloropheneoxy) benzaldehyde (868 mg, 3.25 mmol, 1.0 eq.) and sodium cyanoborohydride (612 mg, 9.75 mmol, 3.0 eq.). After initial dissolution of all reactants the reaction mixture was stined until a fine colorless precipitate started to form. Water (0.5mL) was added to redissolve the colorless solid. The reaction mixture was then stined at room temperature for 24h.
  • Described below are various assays for measuring anti-invasin activity and the effect of compounds on cell growth. These assays are useful for assessing the compounds described herein and related compounds.
  • HWP1 The expression of the HWP1 gene has been co ⁇ elated with invasion in C. albicans and thus can be used as a marker for invasion. Fusion of the HWP1 promoter with lacZ provides an easy assay to measure the potential anti-invasin effects of test compounds.
  • stock cultures for use in this assay are prepared by streaking C. albicans (MC295: ura3 ⁇ : : imm434/ura3 ⁇ : : imm434 arg4::hisG/arg4::hisG hisl : :hisG/HISl HWPl::HWPlp-lacZ(URA3)/HWPl gall::ARG4/GALl) cells on a YPD plate.
  • C. albicans MC295: ura3 ⁇ : : imm434/ura3 ⁇ : : imm434 arg4::hisG/arg4::hisG hisl : :hisG/HISl HWPl::HWPlp-lacZ(URA3)/HWPl gall::ARG4/GALl
  • the cells are grown at 30°C for 14-18 hr and an isolated colony is picked and inoculated into a 250 ml Erlenmeyer flask containing Non-Inducing Media (NT) (per liter: 1.5 g yeast nitrogen base w/o amino acids or ammonium sulfate, 5 g ammonium sulfate, 0.2mmol Inositol, 50 ml of 40% glucose, 120 ml of 0.5M succinate, pH adjusted to 4.5) that is sterilized by passing it through a 0.22 ⁇ m filter.
  • NT Non-Inducing Media
  • the flask is placed on a rotary shaker at 30°C between 200-250 ⁇ m, for 14- 18 hr.
  • optical density at 600 nm (OD O OO) is determined using NI media as a blank.
  • the overnight culture is diluted with 15% glycerol to a final OD 600 of 0.1 and aliquotted into 1 ml sterile cryonic tubes that are capped and stored at -80°C.
  • MC295 thawed Candida albicans
  • 1/1 (vol/vol) serial dilutions are made into two additional flasks, each containing 25 ml of NI medium.
  • the flasks are placed on a rotary shaker at 30 °C between 200-250 ⁇ m, for 14-18 h.
  • the OD 6 oo for each culture is determined using NI medium as a blank.
  • the flask containing cells at an OD 6 oo of 0.8-1.0 is transfe ⁇ ed to a 50 ml Falcon tube and centrifuged 5 minutes at 2000 ⁇ m. The supernatant is discarded and the pellet is resuspended in an equal volume of Inducing Media. The washed cells are immediately used as a 10X stock for the HWPl-lacZ reporter assay.
  • 10 ⁇ l of 10X cell stock is added to 80 ⁇ l of Inducing Media (per liter: 1.5 g yeast nitrogen base w/o amino acids or ammonium sulfate, 5 g ammonium sulfate, 0.2 mmol Inositol, 50 ml of 40% glucose, 50 ml of IM MOPS, pH adjusted to 7.5 with IN NaOH) and 10 ⁇ l of 10X test compound stock or, as a control, DMSO, in a Corning, tissue culture treated, flat-bottom, microtiter plate. The plate is incubated at 37°C for 3 hr.
  • Inducing Media per liter: 1.5 g yeast nitrogen base w/o amino acids or ammonium sulfate, 5 g ammonium sulfate, 0.2 mmol Inositol, 50 ml of 40% glucose, 50 ml of IM MOPS, pH adjusted to 7.5 with IN NaOH
  • HWPl-lacZ reporter is assessed by measuring ⁇ -galactosidase activity with a fluorogenic substrate. Briefly, MUG stock (54 mg/ml 4-methylumbelliferyl beta-D-galactoside in DMSO) is diluted to 0.4 mg/ml in Z buffer (per liter: 16.1 gNa 2 HP0 4 » 7H 2 0), 5.5 g NaH 2 P0 4 » H 2 0, 0.75g KCl, 0.246 g MgSO 4 *H20, lOOmg of sodium deoxycholic acid, 200mg of CTAB, 1.62 ml beta-mercaptoethanol, pH 7.0) to create MUG/Z solution.
  • Z buffer per liter: 16.1 gNa 2 HP0 4 » 7H 2 0
  • 5.5 g NaH 2 P0 4 » H 2 0, 0.75g KCl
  • MgSO 4 *H20 lOOmg of sodium deoxycholic acid
  • 200mg of CTAB 1.62 m
  • DMSO treated cells define the maximal level of reporter induction ("no drug control") while cells treated with 15 ⁇ g/ml amphotericin B (AMB) mimic the effect of complete inhibition of reporter induction.
  • % inhibition (l-(F[449] test c om p oun - F[449]A MB controi)/(F[449] DM so control ⁇ F(449)AMB control)* 100.
  • the IC 50 is determined for each compound of interest.
  • This assay is similar to the HWP-lacZ Reporter Assay (logarithmic phase growth) assays described above, except that the assay takes place when the cells are in the stationary phase.
  • stock cultures for use in this assay are prepared by streaking C. albicans (MC-295: ura3 ⁇ ::imm434/ura3 ⁇ ::imrn434 hisl::hisG/hisl::hisG arg4: :MsG/arg4: :hisG hisl::hisG/+
  • HWPl/HWPlp-lacZ(URA3) gal::ARG4/GAL) cells for isolation on a YPD agar plate.
  • the cells are grown at 30°C for 14-18 h, and an isolated colony is added to 5 mL of YPD broth and grown on a roller drum (60 ⁇ m) for 14-18 h at 30°C.
  • Stocks are prepared by aliquotting 600 ⁇ L of culture into 1 mL of 25% glycerol. The stocks are stored at -80°C.
  • Cultures for assays are prepared by streaking frozen culture stock on a YPD agar plate and growing the cells for 30 °C for 14-18 h. A single colony is inoculated into 5 mL of YPD in a test tube and grown on a roller drum (60 ⁇ m) for 2 days at 30°C to late stationary phase (OD ⁇ oo ⁇ 30).
  • the primary cell suspension stock is diluted to an OD 600 of 1.0 ( ⁇ 2xl0 7 cells/mL) to make a 10X stock.
  • 10 ⁇ L of 10X cell stock is added to 80 ⁇ L of Inducing Media (see below) and 10 ⁇ L of 10X test compound stock or, as a control, DMSO in a Corning, tissue-culture treated, flat-bottom, microtiter plate. The plate is incubated at 37°C for 3 h.
  • ⁇ -galactosidase activity is determined using MUG. Briefly, MUG stock is diluted to 0.4 mg/mL in Z buffer to create MUG/Z solution (see below). To initiate the reaction 100 ⁇ L of MUG/Z solution is added to each test well (final MUG concentration of 0.2 mg/mL) and the plate is incubated at 22 °C for 1 h.
  • %inhibition (l-((unknown) ave -(positive drug control) ave )/((no drug confroi) ave -(positive drug control) ave ))*100.
  • the minimum growth inhibitory concentration for an antifungal drug MlC growth is assessed using a standardized protocol that is described by NCCLS (method M27-A). Briefly, MC305 (ATCC 90028) is streaked from a glycerol stock onto a YPD plate. Cells are incubated for 24 hr at 35°C. Five isolated colonies are picked and resuspended in 5 ml of 0.85 % saline. A hemocytometer is used to verify that this is a yeast stock suspension of 1-5 x 10 6 cells/ml. Cells are then diluted in RPMI 1640 to obtain 1-5 x 10 5 (20X) cells/ml stock (this is the adjusted lOx inoculum).
  • the RPMI 1640 media (with glutamine, without bicarbonate and with a pH indicator) media is made by dissolving 10.4 g powdered medium in 900-ml dH 2 0 and 34.53 g MOPS are added (to a final concentration of 0.165 M). While stirring, the pH is adjusted to 7.0 at 25" using 1 N NaOH and 45 ml of 40% dextrose is added to give a 2 % final concentration. Finally, the volume is adjusted to 1 liter and the media is filter sterilized and stored at 4°C.
  • Test compounds are diluted from 100 mM to 6.4 mg/ml (100X) stock in DMSO in triplicate. All subsequent series of 2x dilutions are performed in DMSO. Aliquots can be kept 6 months at -80 °C. The test compound should be in DMSO at room temperature for several hours before the test. The final DMSO is concentration is 1% for the test compound solution and the compound control.
  • a series of 2-fold test compound dilutions are tested (e.g, 64, 32, 16, 8, 4 , 2, 1, 0.5, 0.25, and 0.125 ⁇ g/ml) along with a "no test compound control" and a "no cells" control.
  • the testing is performed in a 96 well plate. Each well contains: 2 ⁇ l of lOOx-test compound stock; 163 ⁇ l of RPMI 1640, 25 ⁇ l of 0 Alamar Blue (Biosource; Catalog Number DALl 100); 10 ⁇ l of the adjusted inoculum (yields about 500- 2500 cells/well) (except for the "no cells" control).
  • the plate is incubated in a moist chamber for 24 hr at 35°C.
  • MlCg rowth is defined as the lowest concentration of an antifungal that substantially inhibits growth of the organism as detected visually.
  • Various known anti-fungal drugs can be used as additional controls as indicated below.
  • Invasion can be associated with dramatic mo ⁇ hological transitions.
  • C. albicans this is the transition from yeast form cells in non-inducing media to filamentous forms in inducing media.
  • a single colony is inoculated into 5 ml of YPD in a test tube and grown on a roller drum (60 ⁇ m) for 2 days at 30°C to stationary phase (OD 6 oo ⁇ 30). Cells are pelleted and washed with water and can be stored at 4°C for up to 2 weeks before use.
  • this stock is diluted to 2.5x10 5 cells/ml to make a 10X stock.
  • 10 ⁇ l of this cell stock is added to 80 ⁇ l of Inducing Media and 10 ⁇ l of 10X compound stock or DMSO in a Corning, tissue culture treated, flat-bottom, microtiter plate. The plate is incubated at 37°C for 24 hr without agitation.
  • Each well is observed microscopically and cells are scored on a scale of 1-5 with regard to cellular mo ⁇ hology.
  • a score of 5 indicates that C. albicans cells have many long hyphae and is the wild type (WT) phenotype (no drug control).
  • a score of 1 indicates cells are non-hyphal with only "yeast-like" cells and budding cells.
  • Scores of 2, 3, and 4 indicate shorter length or reduced quantity of hyphae when compared with WT (a score of 2 being very near non-hyphal and a score of 4 being close to WT.
  • Compounds that result in a phenotypic score of 1 or 2 at a given concentration are considered to have significant anti-invasin properties.
  • the MIC; nV asi on is defined in this assay as the minimum concentration of test compound that results in a phenotypic score of 1 or 2.
  • human hepatoma cell line HepG2 are exposed to a compound and the (LD 50 ) was determined. Briefly, HepG2 human hepatoma cells (American Type Culture Collection, Bethesda MD) are plated at 1 x 10 5 cells/well in tissue culture treated 96 well plates and incubated at 5% C0 2 , 37 °C for 18 h prior to initiation of the assay. The compound stocks at 100 mM in DMSO are added to DM (defined media, media without serum with added insulin, selenium and fransferrin) at an initial concentration of 1000 ⁇ M and serially diluted 1 to 3 in DM in a 96 well plate.
  • DM defined media, media without serum with added insulin, selenium and fransferrin
  • LD50 (concenfration at 50% of lethal dose) is calculated as the concentration that leads to a response of 50% compared to the control cells. Thus, cytotoxicity is measured as percent of inhibition of cell viability as determined by the Alamar Blue assay.
  • C. albicans are prepared by growing strains 48 hrs in YPD at 30°C with shaking. Cells are pelleted by centrifugation and diluted in sterile water to an OD 60 o of 1.0. This stock is stored at 4°C until ready for use (up to one week).
  • the following reagents are mixed in individual wells of a 96 well plate: 85 ⁇ l of RPMI media, 5 ⁇ l of test compound (diluted in 25mM HEPES buffer, pH 7.5), and 10 ⁇ l of stock C. albicans cells. Plates are incubated at 37°C overnight to allow time for adherence.
  • Non-adherent cells are removed by washing with 150 ⁇ l of water using an M384 Atlas platewasher; program: Dispense Height: 150; Dispense Rate: 1; Dispense Orientation X/Y/Z: 0/0/0, Aspiration Height: 50, Aspiration Rate: 2; Aspiration Orientation X/Y/Z: 0/0/0; Method: 96 wells, lx).
  • Cell adherence is quantified by measuring OD 600 of each well. Percent inhibition of adherence is calculated as: [1-(OD 600 of well containing the test compound/OD ⁇ oo of DMSO treated control well)]*100. Percent inhibition values of greater than 80% were scored as significantly inhibited.
  • Invasion into agar substrates can be used as an in vitro su ⁇ ogate to mimic the process of fungal invasion in vivo.
  • This assay can be performed in high throughput with many C. albicans isolates or to test the response of specific strains to many different potential anti-invasin compounds.
  • C. albicans strain MC12 (SC5314) is a well-studied clinical isolate that performs very robustly in this assay. MC12 is inoculated into each well of a 96-well plate containing 150 ⁇ l YPD/well and grown overnight (12-18 hrs) on an orbital shaker at 30°C.
  • Cells are serially diluted (1:10) into fresh YPD and plated in 5 ⁇ l droplets (in a grid formation) on YPD plates with and without test compound. Plates are incubated at 37°C for 4 days and scored for the invasion response. To distinguish cells that have invaded into the agar from those growing on the surface, plates are washed under a stream of tap water and non-invaded cells are removed by rubbing gentle, manual rubbing. In the absence of an anti-invasin compound, masses of filaments are readily observable below both isolated colonies and dense patches of cells. Anti-invasin compounds block the ability of C.
  • MlCg r owt h is defined as the minimum concentration of a test compound necessary to dramatically inhibit growth on the plate.
  • MICi nvas i on is defined as the minimum concentration of test compound necessary to significantly reduce the number of invaded cells.
  • a key aspect of fungal pathogenesis is the invasion of fungal cells across the epithelial and endothelial cell barriers.
  • An in vitro system to mimic this has been described by Weide and Ernst
  • Caco-2 monolayers are prepared by seeding cells in 6-well culture dishes containing removable porous inserts (3 ⁇ m pore diameter). Caco-2 cells are grown in media consisting of Dulbeccos Modified Eagle Media (DMEM) (lacking glutamine and sodium pyruvate) supplemented with 4.5 g/1 glucose, 20% fetal calf serum (heat inactivated), 292 mg/ml glutamine, 1% non-essential amino acids, and 1 mM sodium pyruvate. 2 ml of growth media is added to both the upper and lower compartments and replaced every 2-3 days. Plates of cells are maintained at 37°C, 5% C0 2 ,
  • DMEM Dulbeccos Modified Eagle Media
  • C. albicans 95% humidity for 10-25 days to generate confluent monolayers of differentiated Caco-2 cells.
  • Caco-2 media is removed, cells are washed once with PBS, ana rresn L-aco- culture media (without fetal calf serum) is added.
  • C. albicans cells of the strain MCI 2 are grown overnight in YPD, pelleted, and washed once in sterile water.
  • C. albicans are added to each test well +/- compound at a final concentration of 2 x 10 6 C. albicans cells/ml.
  • C. albicans and Caco-2 cells are co-cultured for up to 24 hrs (37°C, 5% C0 2 , 95% humidity).
  • Migration across the Caco-2 monolayer is assessed by detection of C. albicans in the lower compartment (collected by washing and centrifugation to concentrate). Cells that are able to invade can be readily detected in the lower compartment within 12-24 hrs while C. albicans that are inhibited by an effective dose of anti-invasin are trapped within the upper compartment only.
  • the MIC; nvas jo n in this assay is defined in this assay as the minimum concentration of test compound that completely inhibits migration of C. albicans across the Caco-2 monolayer after incubation for 24 hrs.
  • a mouse model of fungal invasion is used to examine the in vivo efficacy of a test compound in reducing invasion by C. albicans. This can be done in several ways. Two specific variations are described below.
  • the compounds of formulas (I), (TI), (HI), (TV), and (V) are thiazolesulfonamide and isothiazolesulfonamide-based inhibitors of fungal invasion. They can be represented by the general formulas A' and B' respectively.
  • Compounds of formula A' contain a substituted or unsubstituted phenyl or thienyl sulfonamide group at C-2 of the thiazole ring, while compounds of formula B' contain a substituted or unsubstituted pnenyl or thienyl sulfonamide group at the C-3 position of the isothiazole ring.
  • stable refers to compounds which possess stability sufficient to allow manufacture and which maintains the integrity of the compound for a sufficient period of time to be useful for the pu ⁇ oses detailed herein (e.g, therapeutic or prophylactic administration to a subject).
  • Fungus inhibiting compounds can be identified through both in vitro (cell and non-cell based) and in vivo methods. A description of these methods is described in the Examples.
  • the 2-aminothiazoles are commercially available (e.g, Aldrich Chemical, Milwaukee, WT) or may be synthesized by the method of Kulkarni et al.(See Kulkarni, K. D.; Shirsat, M. V, "Chemistry of the thiazoles-synthesis of 2-amino-5-alkylthiazoles," J Sci. and Ind. Research (India) 1959, 18B, 411-13).
  • all or some of the substituents (R 1 , R 2 , R 4 , etc.) desired in the final sulfonamide product may also be present in the reactants 1, 2, and or 3 when the amine-sulfonyl chloride coupling reaction takes place.
  • the sulfonyl chlorides 1 and 2 in turn can be prepared by methods that are within skill of the art.
  • metallation of bromides 6a and 6b with n-butyllithium, followed by the sequential addition of sulfur dioxide and sulfuryl chloride can also afford aromatic and heteroaromatic sulfonylchlorides 1 and 2.
  • R ⁇ is a leaving group (e.g, halo, triflate, mesylate, nosylate, etc.), it is possible to replace the leaving group with another substituent.
  • R ⁇ is a leaving group (e.g, halo, triflate, mesylate, nosylate, etc.)
  • aryl boronic acid e.g, 8a
  • an aryl stannane e.g, 8b
  • an aryl zinc halide e.g, 8c
  • a palladium catalyst e.g, Pd(PPh 3 ) 4 or PdCl 2 (dppf)
  • the reaction may be carried out in the presence of a base (e.g, K 2 C0 3 or triethylamine).
  • the transformation may also be conducted with heteroaromatic coupling partners (e.g, thiophene, pyridine, furan, etc.) bearing boronic acid, trialkyltin, and halozinc substituents.
  • heteroaromatic coupling partners e.g, thiophene, pyridine, furan, etc.
  • Metal catalyzed coupling reactions are described in: Herrmann, Wolfgang A. The Suzuki cross-coupling. Applied Homogeneous Catalysis with Organometallic Compounds (2nd Edition) (2002), 1 591-598 (boronic acid cross couplings); Hassan, Jwanro; Sevignon, Marc; Gozzi, Christel; Schulz, Emmanuelle; Lemaire, Marc. Aryl-Aryl Bond
  • the latter species can be generated in situ from the conesponding alcohols, phenols, thiols or thiophenol (e.g, R 14 XH) with a base e.g, sodium hydride, potassium hydride, potassium hydroxide, or a tertiary amine (Scheme 6).
  • 4g R 6 F
  • the compounds of formula B' e.g, 15 and 16 can also be prepared as described above by the reaction between the 3-aminothiazole 14 with either phenylsulfonyl chloride 1 or thienylsulfonyl chloride 2 (Scheme 7).
  • the 3-aminoisothiazoles may be obtained in a stepwise manner (Scheme 8) from the corresponding 3-aminoisoxazole 17 via palladium catalyzed hydrogenation, followed by in situ treatment of the acyclic reduction product with phosphorus pentasulfide and chloranil (see e.g, D. N. McGregor, U.. Corbin, J. E. Swigor, L. C. Cheney, Tetrahedron 1969, 25, 389).
  • all or some of the substituents (R 1 , R 2 , R 4 , etc.) desired in the final sulfonamide product may also be present in the reactants 1, 2, and or 3 when the amine-sulfonyl chloride coupling reaction takes place.
  • isothiazole compounds e.g, 15 can be obtained from the conesponding isoxzaole compound 18 using essentially the same reaction conditions as those employed in Scheme 8 to covert compound 17 to compound 14 (see Scheme 9).
  • Scheme 9
  • Isothiazole compounds 19, 15c, 15d, 15e, 15f, and 15h are analogous to thiazole compounds 9, 4c, 4d, 4e, 4f, and 4h.
  • the compounds can be prepared by the methods described above from the R ⁇ -halo substituted compounds 15a, 15b, and 15g and the reaction partners described in Schemes 4-8.
  • the synthesized thiazole and isothiazole compounds can be separated from a reaction mixture and further purified by a method such as column chromatography, high pressure liquid chromatography, or recrystallization. As can be appreciated by the skilled artisan, further methods of synthesizing the compounds of the formulae herein will be evident. Additionally, the various synthetic steps may be performed in an alternate sequence or order to give the desired compounds. Synthetic chemistry transformations and protecting group methodologies (protection and deprotection) useful in synthesizing the compounds described herein are known in the art and include, for example, those such as described in R. Larock, Comprehensive Organic Transformations, VCH Publishers (1989); T.W. Greene and P.G.M.
  • the thiazole and isothiazole compounds of this invention may contain one or more asymmetric centers and thus occur as racemates and racemic mixtures, single enantiomers, individual diastereomers and diastereomeric mixtures. All such isomeric forms of these compounds are expressly included in the present invention.
  • the compounds of this invention may also be represented in multiple tautomeric forms, in such instances, the invention expressly mcludes all tautomeric forms of the compounds described herein (e.g, alkylation of a ring system may result in alkylation at multiple sites, the invention expressly includes all such reaction products). All such isomeric forms of such compounds are expressly included in the present invention. All crystal fo ⁇ ns of the compounds described herein are expressly included in the present invention.
  • the thiazole and isothiazole compounds of this invention include the compounds themselves, as well as their salts and their prodrugs, if applicable.
  • a salt for example, can be formed between an anion and a positively charged substituent (e.g, amino) on a thiazole or isothiazole compound. Suitable anions include chloride, bromide, iodide, sulfate, nitrate, phosphate, citrate, methanesulfonate, trifluoroacetate, and acetate.
  • a salt can also be formed between a cation and a negatively charged substituent (e.g, carboxylate) on a thiazole or isothiazole compound.
  • Suitable cations include sodium ion, potassium ion, magnesium ion, calcium ion, and an ammonium cation such as tetramethylammonium ion.
  • Examples of prodrugs include esters and other pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives, which, upon administration to a subject, are capable of providing active thiazole or isothiazole compounds.
  • the compounds of this invention may be modified by appending appropriate functionalities to enhance selective biological properties.
  • modifications are known in the art and include those which increase biological penetration into a given biological compartment (e.g, blood, lymphatic system, central nervous system), increase oral availability, increase solubility to allow administration by injection, alter metabolism and alter rate of excretion.
  • Step 1 Preparation of 4-bromo-N-(5-methylisothiazol-3-yl)benzenesulfonamide.
  • a 50 mL round bottom flask was charged with 3-amino-5-methylisothiazole (125 mg, 1.1 mmol), pyridine (5 mL, 62 mmol) and 4-bromobenzenesulfonyl chloride (280 mg, 1.1 mmol).
  • the reaction mixture was stined at 23 °C for 20 h, and then diluted with ethyl acetate (50 mL), partitioned with water (20 mL), and adjusted to pH 1 with 3N HCl.
  • Step 2 Preparation of 4-r3-methylbutyl)-N-(5-methylisothiazol-3-yl)benzenesulfonamide.
  • 4- Bromo-N-(5-methylisothiazol-3-yl)benzenesulfonamide (500 mg, 0.1.50 mmol) and tetrakis(triphenylphosphine) palladium (93 mg, 0.08 mmol) were dissolved in 6.5 mL of dry DMF.
  • 3- Methylbutylzinc bromide 0.5M in THF, 6.50 mL, 3.25 mmol was added via syringe at room temperature.
  • the brownish-green solution was stined for 2h at 85 °C until analysis by LC-MS indicated complete consumption of the starting material.
  • the mixture was extracted with dichloromethane (3 x 50 mL) the combined organic layers were washed with of brine, dried over Na S0 and concentrated in vacuo.
  • the crude product was purified by flash chromatography ⁇ uc ⁇ ttnc&/cu ⁇ y ⁇ ⁇ c ⁇ . ⁇ .
  • Step 1 Preparation of 4-fluoro-N-(5 -methylisothiazol-3 -vDbenzenesulfonamide. Palladium. 10 wt. % (dry basis) on activated carbon (2.6 g, 1.2 mmol, 0.03 equiv) was added to a solution of 4-fluoro-N- (5-methylisoxazol-3-yl)benzenesulfonamide (9.0 g, 35 mmol) in 200 mL of ethyl acetate. The reaction mixture was flushed with hydrogen and stined under 1 ATM of hydrogen at 23 °C for 20 h.
  • the palladium on carbon was removed by flushing the crude reaction mixture through a plug of silica gel with ethyl acetate. The filtrate was then concentrated to afford a clear oil. The clear oil was dissolved in toluene, and then P 4 S ⁇ 0 (23.4 g, 52.6 mmol, 1.5 equiv) was added followed by p-chloranil (8.6 g, 35.0 mmol). The reaction mixture was heated to 115 °C with vigorous stirring for 25 min. After cooling to 23 °C, the mixture was filtered and rinsed with water (50 mL) and dichloromethane (300 mL).
  • This solid was purified by silica gel chromatography (15% ethyl acetate/hexanes to 40% ethyl acetate/hexanes) to give crude 4-fluoro-N-(5 -methylisothiazol-3 - y ⁇ )benzenesulfonamide, which was recrystallized in ethyl acetate/hexanes to furnish pure product as an off-white crystalline solid (1.93 g, 20% yield, mp 154.3 °C.
  • Step 2 Preparation of Preparation of N-(5-methylisothiazol-3-yl)-4- propoxybenzenesulfonamide.
  • Sodium hydride (95%, 35.3 mg, 1.4 mmol) was covered with dry dimethyl sulfoxide (0.5 mL) at room temperature.
  • the mixture was rapidly stined and heated to 60- 70 °C for 1 h to generate the dimsyl anion.
  • the pale gray-green solution was cooled to room temperature, neat 1- propanol (0.12 mL, 1.6 mmol) was added by syringe and stirring was continued 20 min at room temperature.
  • Example 2 Based on compounds that received a score of less than 5 in the morphology assay described above in Example 2, a number of structurally related compounds having Formulas (I) - (V) were prepared and tested for the ability to inhibit fungal invasion using the methods described in Example 2. These compounds are depicted in the table of FIG. 2. In this Table the structure of the tested compound in depicted in the first column. Results are reported for the following tests: C. albicans logarithmic phase growth invasion assay (column 2), C. albicans stationary phase growth invasion assay (column 3), C. albicans minimum inhibitory concentration (column 4), C. albicans overnight growth inhibition (%)
  • mice model of fungal invasion in vivo can also be used to further characterize the compounds in FIG. 2 as well as related compounds and other compounds described herein.
  • Certain compounds that can be used in practicing the invention have the general formula VI, in which R 1 , R 1' , R 2 , R 2' , R 3 , R 3' , R 4 , R 4' , R 5 , R 5' , R 6 , and R 6' are attached to a 6-membered, carbocyclic core as shown below.
  • R includes a carboxylic acid group, which may be connected either directly to the core or indirectly through a (CH 2 ) n tether.
  • n is 0 or 1.
  • R 4 can be any alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkenyl, heterocycloalkenyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group. Each of these possible R 4 groups can be unsubstituted, or substituted with one or more substituents.
  • R 4 groups include substituted or unsubstituted straight or branched C ⁇ -C ⁇ 2 alkyl (e.g, Ci-Cio, C ⁇ -C 8 , C C 6 , C ⁇ -C 4 ); substituted or unsubstituted straight or branched C ⁇ -C ⁇ 2 alkyl (e.g, Ci- o, -Cg, -C 6 , C C 4 ) containing one or more heteroatoms (e.g, nitrogen, sulfur, or oxygen) inserted into one or more positions in the straight or branched alkyl chain; substituted or unsubstituted straight or branched C 2 -C] 2 alkenyl (e.g, Q Cio, C 2 -C 3 , C 2 -C 6 , C 2 -C ); substituted or unsubstituted straight or branched C 2 -C ⁇ 2 alkynyl (e.g, C 2 -C 1 0, C 2 -C 8 , C
  • Substituents for R 4 can include C 3 -C 8 cycloalkyl, halo, hydroxy, mercapto, C C ⁇ 0 alkoxy, -Cio thioalkoxy, amino, Ci-Cio alkylamino, Cj-Cio dialkylamino, C ⁇ -C 10 haloalkyl, acyl and oxo.
  • R 4 can have any one of formulas A", B", C", D", or E".
  • X may be N, O, or S, m may be 0-4 and n may be 1-4.
  • the core may be a saturated moiety, i.e., it does not contain any double bonds. The remaining positions
  • R 1' , R 2 , R 2' , R 3 , R 3' , R 4' , R 5 , R 5' , R 5 , and R 6' may be filled by any combination of hydrogen and -C 6 alkyl.
  • one of R r , R 2' , R 3' , R 4' , R 5 , or R 6' and another of R 1' , R 2' , R 3' , R 4' , R 5' , or R 6' together form a bridging C1-C3 alkylene group, e.g, -CH 2 CH 2 -, between two of the ring carbons of the core.
  • the core may be unsaturated and contain 1-3 double bonds in the carbocyclic ring.
  • Prefened core structures include formulas F", G", and H"
  • Compounds having formula G" can exhibit cis-trans isomerism.
  • R 1 and " occur on the same face or side of the cyclohexyl ring, while in the trans isomer, R 1 and R 4 occur on opposite faces or sides of the cyclohexyl ring.
  • the methods and compositions of the invention include the use of a mixture of both the cis isomer and the trans isomer of a compound having formula G".
  • the mixture contains at least about 50 percent (at least about 60 percent, at least about 70 percent, at least about 80 percent, at least about 90 percent, at least about 95 percent, at least about 98 percent, at least about 99 per cent) of the cis isomer.
  • the mixture contains at least about 50 percent (at least about 60 percent, at least about 70 percent, at least about 80 percent, at least about 90 percent, at least about 95 percent, at least about 98 percent, at least about 99 percent) of the trans isomer.
  • both the cis and the trans isomer can be used in combination to treat a bacterial infection.
  • stable refers to compounds which possess stability sufficient to allow manufacture and which maintains the integrity of the compound for a sufficient period of time to be useful for the purposes detailed herein (e.g, therapeutic or prophylactic administration to a subject).
  • the cyano moieties can then be hydrolyzed to the conesponding acids (3) by heating in aqueous sodium hydroxide followed by acidification. Intramolecular cyclization can be promoted under Perkin condensation conditions to ) provide 4-acetyl-4-R-cyclohexanone derivatives (4).
  • the 4-substituted bicyclo[2.2.2]octane-l-ol derivatives (5) can then be prepared from 4 by intramolecular Aldol condensation. Reduction of the 3- oxo group of 5 can be achieved under Wolff-Kishner conditions to form 6.
  • the 3-oxo group may first be converted to the bis-thioketal (not shown) using 1 ,2-ethanedithiol.
  • the bis-thioketal can subsequently be reduced in the presence of Raney nickel to afford the des-keto derivative 6.
  • compound 6 may be used to prepare compounds having formula H".
  • Treatment of bicyclo[2.2.2]octan-l-ol 6 with a mixture of concentrated hydrobromic acid and zinc bromide can afford the conesponding tertiary bromide 7 in good yield.
  • the bromo derivative can then be converted to the conespondmg carboxylic acid 8 using sulfuric acid, silver sulfate and formic acid following essentially the same method as that described in Koch and Haaf (W. Angew. Chem., 1958, 70, 3113).
  • the acetic acid derivative 10 can be prepared as follows. Acid 8 can be reduced to the alcohol 9 by reduction with lithium aluminum hydride. Tosylate formation, followed by cyanide displacement and hydrolysis can provide 10.
  • the compounds described herein can be separated from a reaction mixture and further purified by a method such as column chromatography, high-pressure liquid chromatography, or recrystallization. As can be appreciated by the skilled artisan, further methods of synthesizing the compounds of the formulae herein will be evident. Additionally, the various synthetic steps may be performed in an alternate sequence or order to give the desired compounds. Synthetic chemistry transformations and protecting group methodologies (protection and deprotection) useful in synthesizing the compounds described herein are known in the art and include, for example, those such as described in R. Larock, Comprehensive Organic Transformations, VCH Publishers (1989); T.W. Greene and P.G.M. Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 2d.
  • the compounds of this invention may contain one or more asymmetric centers and thus occur as racemates and racemic mixtures, single enantiomers, individual diastereomers and diastereomeric mixtures. All such isomeric forms of these compounds are expressly included in the present invention.
  • the compounds of this invention may also contain linkages (e.g, carbon-carbon bonds) wherein bond rotation is restricted about that particular linkage, e.g. restriction resulting from the presence of a ring or double bond. Accordingly, all cis/trans and E/Z isomers are expressly included in the present invention.
  • the compounds of this invention may also be represented in multiple tautomeric forms, in such instances, the invention expressly includes all tautomeric forms of the compounds described herein, even though only a single tautomeric form may be represented (e.g, alkylation of a ring system may result in alkylation at multiple sites, the invention expressly includes all such reaction products). All such isomeric forms of such compounds are expressly included in the present invention. All crystal forms of the compounds described herein are expressly included in the present invention.
  • the compounds of this invention include the compounds themselves, as well as their salts and their prodrugs, if applicable.
  • a salt for example, can be formed between an anion and a positively charged substituent (e.g, amino) on a compound described herein. Suitable anions include chloride, bromide, iodide, sulfate, nitrate, phosphate, citrate, methanesulfonate, trifluoroacetate, and acetate.
  • a salt can also be formed between a cation and a negatively charged substituent (e.g, carboxylate) on a compound described herein.
  • Suitable cations include sodium ion, potassium ion, magnesium ion, calcium ion, and an ammonium cation such as teframethylammonium ion.
  • Examples of prodrugs include esters and other pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives, which, upon administration to a subject, are capable of providing active compounds.
  • the compounds of this invention may be modified by appending appropriate functionalities to enhance selective biological properties.
  • modifications are known in the art and include those which increase biological penetration into a given biological compartment (e.g, blood, lymphatic system, central nervous system), increase oral availability, increase solubility to allow administration by injection, alter metabolism and alter rate of excretion.
  • Compounds of formula H" may be obtained by the methods described herein or obtained from the Aldrich Chemical Company (see sigmaaldrich.com) or Specs and Biospecs (see spec.net).
  • Compounds of formula G" may be obtained from TCI Americas (see tciamerica.com) or Avacado (see alfa.com).
  • Compounds of formula F" may be obtained from Aldrich Chemical Company, TCI Americas, or Lancaster Synthesis (see lancastersynthesis.com).

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Medicines That Contain Protein Lipid Enzymes And Other Medicines (AREA)
  • Medicines Containing Antibodies Or Antigens For Use As Internal Diagnostic Agents (AREA)

Abstract

This invention relates to various anti-fungall agents including agents that are inhibitors of fungal invasion.

Description

Inhibitors of Fungal Invasion
This invention relates to nitrogenous heterocycle-based inhibitors of fungal invasion.
BACKGROUND
Fungal infections are a serious health concern, particularly for patients whose immune systems have been compromised by disease, chemotherapy, or i munosuppressive drugs. The frequency of Candida infections has increased in recent years and has been accompanied by a significant rise in morbidity and mortality. Candidiasis, which is most often caused by the pathogenic yeast Candida albicans, is the most frequent fungal infection associated with AIDS and other immunocompromised states. Many of these infections take place in the hospital setting.
A wide variety of plant-pathogenic fungi (e.g., blights, rusts, molds, smuts, and mildews) cause huge food crop loss and damage to ornamental plants. Plant diseases are caused.by a myriad of invasive fungal pathogens falling into many genera, for example, soft rot (e.g., Rhizopus), leaf curl (e.g., Taphrina), powdery mildew (e.g., Sphaerotheca), leaf spots (e.g., Fulvia), blight (e.g., Alternaria), blast (e.g., Magnaporthe), black rot (e.g., Guignardia), scab (e.g., Venturia), wilts (e.g., Fusarium), rusts (e.g., Puccinia), smuts (e.g., Ustilago), and cankers (e.g., Rhizoctonia).
Recently, there has been great interest in identifying genes that may be implicated as important virulence factors in these infections. The virulence of Candida albicans has been shown to be dependent upon invasion of host tissues; mutations in any of several genes required for invasive growth substantially reduce virulence in a mouse model of systemic infection.
The SSK1 response regulator gene from C. albicans is essential for normal hyphal development and virulence. Cosl, a two-component histidine kinase, is required for normal hyphal growth of C. albicans, and may play a role in virulence properties of the organism. Deletion of the C. albicans gene encoding the mitogen-activated protein kinase Hogl causes derepression of serum induced hyphal formation and a dramatic increase in the survival time of systemically infected mice. Disruption of the C. albicans mitogen activated protein kinase gene, CEKl, adversely affects the growth of serum induced mycelial colonies and attenuates virulence in a mouse model for systemic candidiasis. These and other studies have suggested that hyphal growth may be an important virulence factor in C. albicans: Nonfilamentous C. albicans mutants are avirulent.
The exact mechanism by which hyphal growth acts as a virulence factor is also not known with certainty, but it is believed that there is a correlation between germ tube length and organ invasion in C. aioicans cnmcai isolates, u. albicans may resist intracellular killing by macrophages through the formation of germ tubes.
A variety of antifungal compounds have been developed, some of which also affect hyphal growth. But there is a need for less toxic treatment regimens than those presently available. For example, over 5% of patients treated with fluconazole had adverse reactions, possibly related to the treatment, about half of which necessitated discontinuation of therapy. There is also a need for effective anti- Candida agents having fewer toxicological problems than amphotericin B, which by virtue of their lower toxicities can be administered to high risk patients either prophylactically or at the earliest signs of infection, without the need for a firm diagnosis.
SUMMARY
This invention relates to nitrogenous heterocycle-based inhibitors of fungal invasion (i.e. anti- invasion or anti-invasin agents), compositions comprising such compounds, and methods of treating fungal infections.
The invention features compounds useful in the therapeutic or prophylactic treatment of fungal infection. Examples of fungi which cause fungal infections in humans include, without limitation,
Absidia spp., Absidia corymbifera, Ajellomyces capsulatus, Ajellomyces dermatitidis, Allescheria boydii, Alternaria spp., Anthopsis deltoidea, Aphanomyces spp., Apophysomyces elequans, Armillaria spp., Arnium leoporinum, Arthroderma benhamiae, Arthroderma fulvurn, Arthroderma gypseum, Arthroderma incurvatum, Arthroderma otae, Arthroderma vanbreuseghemii, Aspergillus spp., Aspergillus flavus, Aspergillus fumigatus, Aspergillus niger, Aureobasidium pullulans, Basisdiobolus ranarum, Bipolaris spp., Blastomyces dermatitidis, Botrytis spp., Candida spp., Candida albicans, Candida glabrata, Candida guilliermondii, Candida kefyr, Candida krusei, Candida parapsilosis, Candida pelliculosa, Candida tropicalis, Centrospora spp., Cephalosporium spp., Ceratocystis spp., Chaetoconidium spp., Chaetomiurn spp., Cladophialophora carrionii, Cladosporium spp., Coccidioides immitis, Colletotrichium spp., Conidiobolus spp., Cryptoporiopsis spp., Cylindrocladium spp., Cryptococcus spp., Cryptococcus neoformans, Cunninghamella spp., Cunninghamella bertholletiae, Curvularia spp., Dactylaria spp., Diplodia spp., Epider nophyton spp., Epidermophytonfloccosum, Exserophilium spp., Exophiala spp., Exophiala dermatitidis, Filobasidiella neoformans, Fonsecaea spp., Fonsecaea pedrosoi, Fulvia spp., Fusarium spp., Fusariu n solani, Geotrichum spp., Geotrichum candidum, Guignardia spp., Helminthosporium spp., Histoplasma spp., Histoplasma capsulatum, Hortaea werneckii, Issatschenkia orientalis, Lecythophora spp., Macrophomina spp., Madurella spp., Madurella grisae, Magnaporthe spp., Malassezia furfur, Malassezia globosa, Malassezia obtuse, Malassezia pachydermatis, Malassezia restricta, Malassezia slooffiae, Malassezia sympodialis, Microsporum spp., Microsporum canis, Microspo m fulvurn, Microsporum gypseum, Monϊlinia spp., Mucor spp., Mucor circinelloides, " MyWcentfόsporά dcerina, Nectria spp., Nectria haernatococca, Nocardia spp., Oospora spp., Ophiobolus spp., Paecilomyces spp., Paecilomyces variotii, Paracoccidioides brasiliensis, Penicilliurn spp., Penicillium marneffei, Phaeosclera dematioides, Phaeoannellornyces spp., Phialemoniurn obovatum, Phialophora spp., Phlyctaena spp., Phoma spp., Phomopsis spp., Phymatotrichum spp., Phytophthora spp., Pichia anomala, Pichia guilliermondii, Pythium spp., Piedraia hortai, Pneumocystis carinii, Pseudallescheria boydii, Puccinia spp., Pythium insidiosurn, Rhinocladiella aquaspersa, Rhizomucor pusillus, Rhizoctonia spp., Rhizopus spp., Rhizopus oryzae, Rhodotorula rubra, Saccharomyces spp., Saccharomyces cerevisiae, Saksenaea vasiformis, Sarcinomyces phaeomuriformis, Scedosporium apiospermum, Scerotium spp., Schizophyllum commune, Sclerotinia spp., Sphaerotheca spp., Sporothrix schenckii, Syncephalastrum racemosum, Taeniolella boppii, Taphrina spp., Thielaviopsis spp., Torulopsis spp., Trichophyton spp., Trichophyton mentagrophytes, Trichophyton rubrum, Trichophyton verrucosum, Trichophyton violaceum, Trichosporon spp., Trichosporon asάhii, Trichosporon cutaneum, Trichosporon inkin, Trichosporon mucoides, Ulocladium chartarum, Ustilago spp., Venturia spp., Verticillium spp., Wangiella dermatitidis, Whetxelinia spp., and Xylohypha spp.
Examples of fungi that cause infections in animals include, without limitation, Alternaria spp.,
Aspergillus spp. Candida spp., Cladosporium spp.,, Geotrichum spp., Microsporum canis, Microsporum eguinum, Microsporum gallinae, Microsporum nanum, Paecilomyces spp., Penicillium spp., Trichophyton mentagrophytes, and Trichophyton verucosum.
Certain compounds described herein inhibit fungal invasion and/or reduce viability and/or the replication of fungal cells. The compounds may also be useful for treating, either therapeutically or prophylactically, fungal infections that are not invasive. Preferred compounds are substantially non-toxic to a mammal at dosages that are effective for inhibiting fungal invasion in vivo. Some inhibitors of fungal invasion are not by themselves fungicidal or fungistatic but when administered alone result in effective treatment of disease. Additionally, some compounds described herein, when administered in combination with a fungicidal or fungistatic agent, the combination is an effective therapy and is more effective than the fungicidal or fungistatic agent alone.
Compounds of Formula A
In one aspect this invention features compounds having a formula (A):
Figure imgf000006_0001
(A)
wherein,
each of R , R , R , and R is, independently, hydrogen, or C C6 alkyl;
A is NRsR6;
B is CR'R8; oris absent;
Figure imgf000006_0002
the dashed lines between A and B and between B and C are bonds when B is present, or unshared electron pairs on A and C when B is absent;
R5 is hydrogen; or R5 and R7 together are a bond when B is present;
Rb is RaC(0 , or is absent;
R7 and R5 together are a bond when B is present;
R8 is C,-C4 alkyl, optionally substituted with RbRc or RaC(Q)-
R9 is C6-Cιo aryl, optionally substituted with hydrogen, halo, or -C4 alkyl;
R is hydrogen, or is absent; Ra ϊs d-C4 alkylj optionally substituted with halo, NRbRc or -C(0)NHNHC(0)Rd;
Each of Rb and Rc is, independently, Cι-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 aminoalkyl, C2-C6 alkylaminoalkyl, C2-C6 dialkylaminoalkyl, C7-Cπ aralkyl, or ReC(0)-; or R and Rc together are heterocyclyl, or heterocycloalkenyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 Rf;
Rd is C6-Cιo aryl or 3-10 membered heteroaryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 Rg;
Re is C C6 alkyl, C7-Cπ aralkyl, C6-Cιo aryl, or C6-C10 arylamino, each of which may be substituted with - C4 alkyl, halo or C C alkoxy;
Rf is oxo or Cι-C6 alkyl;
Rε is hydrogen, halo, hydroxy, alkoxy, nitro, amino, cyano, carboxy, Cι-C6 alkyl, C6-Cι0 aryl, or 5-8 membered heteroaryl; and X is O or S.
Embodiments can include one or more of the following:
B can be present or absent.
When B is present, e.g., when B is CHR7R8, R5 and R7 together can be a bond, and R8 can be substituted with NRbRc, e.g., CH(NRbRc)CH3 or CH(NRbRc)CH2CH3.
Rb can be (CH3)2NCH2CH2, benzyl, or C C6 alkyl and Rc can be ReC(0 , in which Re can be C5-
Cn alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted Cβ-Cio arylamino; preferred substituents include CH3 or OCH3.
Rc can be ReC(0)-.
Re can be C5-Cn alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted Cβ-Cio arylamino, wherein the substituents are selected from CH3 or OCH3.
R9 can be a substituted or unsubstituted phenyl, wherein the substituents are selected from halo or
C1-C4 alkyl (e.g., CH3 or chloro).
The invention also includes a method of treating a fungal infection in a subject, the method including administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound having a formula (A). Optionally, the method also includes administering to the subject an antifungal agent in combination with the compound. In various embodiments: the compound of formula (A) and the antifungal agent are administered simultaneously, the compound of formula (A) and the antifungal agent are administered sequentially, the method further includes identifymg the subject as a subject in need of treatment for a fungal infection, and the subject is a human. ine invention also teatures a pnarmaceutical composition comprising a compound having a formula (A) in an amount effective to treat a fungal infection and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In certain embodiments, the composition includes an antifungal agent.
Compounds of Formula O
In another aspect, this invention relates to compounds having a formula (O):
Figure imgf000008_0001
(O)
wherein,
Each of R1 and R2 is, independently, C -C9 alkyl; C7-Cι0 aralkyl; C3-C9 alkenyl, optionally substituted with aryl; C3-C8 cycloalkyl, optionally substituted with Cι-C alkyl; or RaC(0)-;
Each of R3, R4, R5, and R6 is, independently, hydrogen or C C alkyl; and
Ra is 3-8 membered heterocyclyl, optionally substituted with acyl; C7-Cι6 aralkyl optionally substituted with halo; or C6-Cι0 arylamino, optionally substituted with 0-3 C C4 alkyl.
Embodiments can include one or more of the following:
One or both of R1 and R2 can be C7-CιQ aralkyl, e.g., benzyl, -(CH2)2Ph, or -(CH2)3Ph.
One of R1 and R2 can be C3-C9 alkenyl, e.g., 3-phenylallyl.
One of R1 and R2 can be C4-C9 alkyl.
One of R1 and R2 can be C7-C)0 aralkyl. One of R' and R' can be C7-Cι0 aralkyl and the other can be C3-C9 alkenyl.
The invention also includes a method of treating a fungal infection in a subject, the method including administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound having a formula (O). Optionally, the method also includes administering to the subject an antifungal agent in combination with the compound. In various embodiments: the compound of formula (O) and the antifungal agent are administered simultaneously, the compound of formula (O) and the antifungal agent are administered sequentially, the method further includes identifying the subject as a subject in need of treatment for a fungal infection, and the subject is a human.
The invention also features a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound having a formula (O) in an amount effective to treat a fungal infection and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In certain embodiments, the composition includes an antifungal agent.
Compounds of Formula L
In a further aspect, this invention relates to compounds having a formula (L):
Figure imgf000009_0001
(D wherein,
A is N or CH;
R1 is C C12 alkyl, C2-Cι2 alkenyl, 5-12 membered heteroaryl, or RaC(0)-;
R2 is C C12 alkyl, optionally substituted with - HC(0)Rb; or CrC4 alkoxy;
Each of R3, R4, R5, and R6 is, independently, hydrogen, or Cι-C alkyl; "R* is'"C,'-Cι2 alkyl; and
Rb is C6-C10 aryl.
Embodiments can include one or more of the following.
R1 can be C3-C10 alkenyl (e.g., -(CH2)6CH=CH2).
R2 can be -OCH2CH3.
The invention also mcludes a method of treating a fungal infection in a subject, the method including administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound having a formula (L). Optionally, the method also includes administering to the subject an antifungal agent in combination with the compound. In various embodiments: the compound of formula (L) and the antifungal agent are administered simultaneously, the compound of formula (L) and the antifungal agent are administered sequentially, the method further includes identifymg the subject as a subject in need of treatment for a fungal infection, and the subject is a human.
The invention also features a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound having a formula (L) in an amount effective to treat a fungal infection and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In certain embodiments, the composition includes an antifungal agent. '
Compounds of Formula E
Figure imgf000010_0001
(E) In one aspect, this invention relates to compounds having a formula (E):
wherein, R' is C C4 alkyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 Ra; C7-Cι6 aralkyl, optionally substituted with 1-
3 Ra; 6-16 membered heteroaralkyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 Ra; C3-C4 alkenyl, optionally substituted with 1-2 Ra;
A is C6-Cιo aryloxy, optionally substituted with thioaryloxy or thioalkoxy; 3-8 membered heterocyclyl, optionally substituted with C7-Cι6 aralkyl; or CHR7R8;
R2 is hydrogen or hydroxy; or R2 and R7 together are a bond;
Each of R3, R4, R5, and R6 is, independently, hydrogen, Cι-C4 alkyl, or Cι-C4 alkoxy;
R7 is hydrogen; or R7 and R2 together are a bond;
R8 is aryl, optionally substituted with -C alkoxy; and
Each Ra is, independently, hydroxy; Cι-C6 alkyl; Cι-C4 alkoxy; Cβ-Cio aryloxy, optionally substituted with halo; 5-8 membered heteroaryl, optionally substituted with C C4 alkyl; C6-Cι0 aryl, " optionally substituted with C2-C6 dialkylamino or methylenedioxo; C7-Cιe aralkoxy; or allyloxy.
Embodiments can include one or more of the following:
R1 can be -C4 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C7 aralkyl, or substituted or unsubstituted 6- membered heteroaralkyl; preferred substituents include C C2 alkoxy, benzyloxy, allyloxy, F, Br, (CH3)2N, CH3, methylenedioxo, or (CH3)2CHNHC(0)-.
A can be CHR7R8 or aryloxy.
R8 can be C7 aralkyl.
R7 and R2 together can be a bond.
The invention also includes a method of treating a fungal infection in a subject, the method including administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound having a formula (E). Optionally, the method also includes administering to the subject an antifungal agent in combination with the compound. In various embodiments: the compound of formula (E) and the antifungal agent are administered simultaneously, the compound of formula (E) and the antifungal agent are administered sequentially, the method further includes identifying the subject as a subject in need of treatment for a fungal infection, and the subject is a human.
The invention also features a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound having a formula (E) in an amount effective to treat a fungal infection and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In certain embodiments, the composition includes an antifungal agent. Com ounds of Formula C
In another aspect, this invention relates to compounds having a formula (C):
Figure imgf000012_0001
(Q wherein,
Each of R1, R2, R3, and R4 is, independently, hydrogen, halo, or Cι-C4 alkyl;
R5 is hydrogen;
A is NR7 or CH2;
R6 is hydrogen; Ci-Cβ alkylamino, optionally substituted with Ra; C6-Cι0 aryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 Ra; or C5-C10 heteroaryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 Ra; or R6 and R7 together are 3-8 membered heterocyclyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 Rb;
R7 is hydrogen; C7-Cι6 aralkyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 Rc; or -C(0)Rd; or R7 and R6 together are 3-8 membered heterocyclyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 Rb;
Each Ra is, independently, halo; methylenedioxo; C6-Cι0 aryloxy, optionally substituted with halo; or C C alkoxy;
Each Rb is, independently, hydroxy, oxo, or C C6 alkyl;
Each Rc is, independently, C C4 alkyl or -G, alkoxy; and
Rd is C6-Cιo aryl, optionally substituted with halo or C C4 alkyl; 5-8 membered heteroaryl; 3-8 membered heterocyclyl; or 5-10 membered heterocycloalkenyl.
Embodiments can include one or more of the following:
A can be CH2 or NR7, in which R7 can be C7 aralkyl or -C(0)Rd. Ru can be Cι-C4 alkylamino substituted with 4-halophenoxy, e.g., when A is CH2.
Rd can be phenyl or halo-substituted phenyl.
The invention also includes a method of treating a fungal infection in a subject, the method including administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound having a formula (C). Optionally, the method also includes administering to the subject an antifungal agent in combination with the compound. In various embodiments: the compound of formula (C) and the antifungal agent are administered simultaneously, the compound of formula (C) and the antifungal agent are administered sequentially, the method further includes identifying the subject as a subject in need of treatment for a fungal infection, and the subject is a human.
The invention also features a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound having a formula (C) in an amount effective to treat a fungal infection and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In certain embodiments, the composition includes an antifungal agent.
Compounds of Formula AA
In a further aspect, this invention relates to compounds having a formula (AA):
Figure imgf000013_0001
(AA)
wherein,
X is or C
A is -NHR3; -OR4; SR5; 3-8 membered heteroaryl, optionally substituted with C6 arylsulfonyl that is substituted with l-3Ra; 3-8 membered heterocyclyl, optionally substituted with Cβ arylsulfonyl that is substituted with l-3Ra; R* and " together are fused C6 aryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 Ra; or fused 5-membered heteroaryl, optionally substituted with 1-2 Ra;
R3, R4, and R5 are each, independently, Cι- 2 alkyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 Rb; C7-Cι0 aralkyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 Rb; 6-12 membered heteroaralkyl, optionally substituted with with 1-3 Rb; 5-10 membered heteroaryl, optionally substituted with with 1-3 Rb; (C C3) alkylene-0-(C C4) alkyl; or (C C3) alkylene-O-(C6-C10) aryl;
Each Ra is, independently, halo, Cι-C6 alkyl, fused Cs-C7 cycloalkyl, C6-Cι0 aryl or 5-10 membered heteroaryl; and
Each R is, independently, halo, - alkoxy, methylenedioxo, -C4 haloalkyl, NH2, di(C C alkyl)amino, (C C alkyl)amino; or a salt thereof.
Embodiments can include one or more of the following:
X is N.
R1 and R2 together can be fused substituted or unsubstituted thienyl; preferred substituents include -C4 alkyl, fused cyclohexyl, or phenyl.
A can be -NHR3, in which R3 can be substituted or unsubstituted C C5 alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted C7-C8 aralkyl; preferred substituents include halo, OCH3, methylenedioxo, or (CH3)2N.
The invention also includes a method of treating a fungal infection in a subject, the method including administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound having a formula (AA). Optionally, the method also includes administering to the subject an antifungal agent in combination with the compound. In various embodiments: the compound of formula (AA) and the antifungal agent are administered simultaneously, the compound of formula (AA) and the antifungal agent are administered sequentially, the method further includes identifying the subject as a subject in need of treatment for a fungal infection, and the subject is a human.
The invention also features a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound having a formula (AA) in an amount effective to treat a fungal infection and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In certain embodiments, the composition includes an antifungal agent. CompouriHs of Formula AB
In one aspect, this invention relates to compounds having a formula (AB):
Figure imgf000015_0001
(AB) wherein,
R1 is C5-C10 heteroaryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 Ra;
R2is C6-Cιo arylsulfonyl, optionally substituted with halo; C C6 alkyl; -C(0)Rb; or C7-C]6 aralkyl;
Each of R3, R4, R5, and R6 is hydrogen;
Each Ra is, independently, halo; C6-CI0 aryl, optionally substituted with halo, hydroxy, or - alkoxy; or Cι-C4 alkyl;
Rb is NHRC; 5-10 membered heteroaryl; or C6-Cι0 aryl, optionally substituted withl-2 - alkoxy; and
Rc is C6-Cιo aryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 halo.
Embodiments can include one or more of the following:
R! can be substituted or unsubstituted quinazolinyl, quinolinyl, or pyrimidinyl.
R2 can be Cj-C4 alkyl (e.g., CH2CH3)or -C(0)Rb, in which Rb can be substituted or unsubstituted arylamino or heteroaryl.
The invention also includes a method of treating a fungal infection in a subject, the method including administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound having a formula (AB). Optionally, the method also includes administering to the subject an antifungal agent in combination with the compound. In various embodiments: the compound of formula (AB) and the antifungal agent are administered simultaneously, the compound of formula (AB) and the antifungal agent are administered sequentially, the method further mcludes identifying the subject as a subject in need of treatment for a fungal infection, and the subject is a human.
The invention also features a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound having a formula (AB) in an amount effective to treat a fungal infection and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In certain embodiments, the composition includes an antifungal agent.
Compounds of Formula K
In another aspect, this invention relates to compounds having a formula (K):
Figure imgf000016_0001
(K) wherein,
R1 is C-C6 alkyl, C7-C9 aralkyl, or -C(0)Ra;
R2 and R2' are each, independently, hydrogen; C C4 alkyl; C3-C5 cycloalkyl; -C(0)Rb; C7-Cj6 aralkyl, optionally substituted with Rc; or 6-16 membered heteroaralkyl, optionally substituted with Rc; or R2 and R2' together are 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, optionally substituted with 1-5 C C4 alkyl;
Each of R3, R4, R5, and R6 is hydrogen;
Ra is C C4 alkyl or C C4 alkoxy;
Rb is C6-C10 aryl, optionally substituted with R° and/or 1-3 Rd; or 5-10 membered heteroaryl, optionally substituted with Rc and/or 1-3 Rd;
R° is C6-Cιo aryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 Rd; C6-Cι0 aryloxy, optionally substituted with 1- 3 Rd; C3-Cs cycloalkyl-Cι-C4 alkoxy; C6-Cι0 arylamino, optionally substituted with 1-3 Rd; C6-Cι0 thioaryloxy, optionally substituted with 1-3 Rd; or C7-Cι6 aralkoxy, optionally substituted with 1-3 Rd; and
Each Rd is, independently, halo, Cι-C6 alkyl, Cι-C4 alkoxy, or CrC4 haloalkyl.
Embodiments can include one or more of the following: R"1 can be -C5 alkyl or C7-C8 aralkyl.
One of R2 and R2' can be substituted or unsubstituted C7-Cι6 aralkyl (e.g., substituted or unsubstituted benzyl, -(CH2)2Ph, or-(CH2)3Ph); preferred substituents include aryloxy substituted with CH3, CF3, halo, or OCH3.
One of R2 and R2' can be CH3.
One of R2 and R2 can be hydrogen.
One of R1 and R2 can be substituted or unsubstituted C7-Cι6 aralkyl and the other can be CH3; preferred substituents include aryloxy substituted with CH3, CF3, halo, or OCH3.
The invention also includes a method of treating a fungal infection in a subject, the method including administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound having a formula (K).
Optionally, the method also includes administering to the subject an antifungal agent in combination with the compound. In various embodiments: the compound of formula (K) and the antifungal agent are administered simultaneously, the compound of formula (K) and the antifungal agent are administered sequentially, the method further includes identifying the subject as a subject in need of treatment for a fungal infection, and the subject is a human.
The invention also features a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound having a formula (K) in an amount effective to treat a fungal infection and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In certain embodiments, the composition includes an antifungal agent.
Compounds of Formula R
In a further aspect, this invention features compounds having a formula (R):
Figure imgf000017_0001
(R)
wherein, ' is Cι-(J2 aiϋyi or (J2 alkenyl;
R2 and R2' are each, independently, hydrogen or CHR3R4;
R3 is C5-Cι4 heteroaryl, optionally substituted with CrC4 alkoxy;
R4 is OR5;
R5 is C6-Cι4 aryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 Ra; -C(0)Rb; 6-14 membered heteroaryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 Ra; C7-C16 aralkyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 Ra;
Each Ra is, independently, halo, Cι-C5 alkyl, or C C4 alkoxy; and
Rb is C6-Cιo aryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 Ra; or 5-10 membered heteroaryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 Ra.
Embodiments can include one or more of the following:
R1 can be CH2CH3 or CH=CH2.
R3 can be unsubstituted or methoxy-substituted quinolinyl.
R5 can be aryl or heteroaryl.
The carbon to which R3 and R4 is attached can have the S configuration or the R configuration.
The invention also includes a method of treating a fungal infection in a subject, the method including administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound having a formula (R). Optionally, the method also includes administering to the subject an antifungal agent in combination with the compound. In various embodiments: the compound of formula (R) and the antifungal agent are administered simultaneously, the compound of formula (R) and the antifungal agent are administered sequentially, the method further includes identifying the subject as a subject in need of treatment for a fungal infection, and the subject is a human.
The invention also features a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound having a formula (R) in an amount effective to treat a fungal infection and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In certain embodiments, the composition includes an antifungal agent. Compound of Formula I
In one aspect, this invention features compounds having a formula (I):
Figure imgf000019_0001
(I)
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein, Ri is substituted or unsubstituted Cι-Cι2 alkyl, or substituted or unsubstituted Cι- 2 alkoxy, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halo and hydroxy; R2 is H or halo; R3 is H, formyl, acetyl, or substituted or unsubstituted Cr C3 alkyl, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halo and hydroxy. Each of R4-Rs is, independently:
(i) H;
(ii) halo;
(iii) substituted or unsubstituted Cι- 2 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C3-C]0 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C2-Cι2 alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted C2-C 2 alkynyl, or NH(Cι-C6 alkyl), wherein the substituents are selected from hydroxy, halo, C Cι2 alkyl, and C3-C8 cycloalkyl;
(iv) OR9; or
(v) phenyl or heteroaryl optionally substituted with 1-5 R1 10
R9 is C3-C10 cycloalkyl, optionally substituted with halo or hydroxy; or -Cπ alkyl, optionally substituted with halo, hydroxy, or C3-Cι0 cycloalkyl.
Each R10 is, independently, halo, hydroxy, ORa, ORb, acyloxy, nitro, amino, NHRa, N(Ra)2, NHRb, N(Rb)2, aralkylamino, mercapto, thioalkoxy, S(0)Ra, S(0)Rb, S02Ra, S02Rb, NHS02Ra, NHS02Rb, sulfate, phosphate, cyano, carboxyl, C(0)Ra, C(0)Rb, C(0)ORa, C(0)NH2, C(0)NHRa, C(0)N(Ra)2, alkyl, haloallcyl, C3-Cι0 cycloalkyl containing 0-3 R„ C3-C10 heterocyclyl containing 0-3 Rc, C -C yke yl C2-G6 alkynyT,''C5-Cio cycloalkenyl, C5-C10 heterocycloalkenyl, C6-C20 aryl containing 0-3 Rd, or C6-C2o heteroaryl containing 0-3 R .
Ra is Cι-C6 alkyl optionally substituted with halo, hydroxy, alkoxy, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, sulfate, or phosphate.
Rb is aryl optionally substituted with halo, haloalkyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, nitro, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, sulfate, or phosphate.
Each Rc is independently halo, haloalkyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, oxo, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, sulfate, or phosphate.
Each R is independently halo, haloalkyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, nitro, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, sulfate, or phosphate; provided that at least one of R4-R8 is not hydrogen; further provided that when R1 is (CH3)2CCH2CH3 or C(CH3)3, R6 is not CH3; further provided that when R1 is CH(CH3)2, R6 is not OCH3 or CH3; and further provided that when R1 is CH3, R4 and R7 are not Cl.
In a further aspect, this invention features a pharmaceutical composition that contains an amount (e.g., an effective amount) of at least one of the compounds described above (e.g. a compound having the formula I and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In certain embodiments, the composition can contain a second antimicrobial agent.
In one aspect, this invention features a method of treating a fungal infection in a subject (including a subject identified as in need of such treatment), the method includes administering an effective amount of a compound (e.g. a compound having the formula I or a pharmaceutical composition described above to the subject. In certain embodiments, the method can include administering a compound or a pharmaceutical composition described above to the subject in combination with a second antimicrobial agent.
Compounds of Formula II
In another aspect, this invention features compounds having a formula (TJ):
Figure imgf000021_0001
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein, each of R1 and R2 is, independently, H, substituted or unsubstituted Cι-Cι2 alkyl, or substituted or unsubstituted -C12 alkoxy, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of hydroxy and halo;
R3 is H, formyl, acetyl, or substituted or unsubstituted - alkyl, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of hydroxy and halo.
Each of R -R is, independently:
( H;
(ii) halo;
(iii) substituted or unsubstituted C C]2 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C3-Cι0 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C2-Cι2 alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted C2-C]2 alkynyl, or
Figure imgf000021_0002
alkyl), wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, halo, -C alkyl, and C3-C8 cycloalkyl;
(iv) OR9; or
(v) phenyl or heteroaryl optionally substituted with 1-5 R 10
R is -C10 cycloalkyl, optionally substituted with halo or hydroxy, or Cι-C]2 alkyl, optionally substituted with halo, hydroxy, or C3-Cι0 cycloalkyl.
Each of R10 is, independently, halo, hydroxy, ORa, ORb, acyloxy, nitro, amino, NHRa, N(Ra)2, NHRb, N(Rb)2, aralkylamino, mercapto, thioalkoxy, S(0)Ra, S(0)Rb, S02Ra, S02Rb, NHS02Ra, NHS srilfa'tέ' pHdsph' T r^ah'όrcarboxyl, C(0)Ra, C(0)Rb, C(0)ORa, C(0)NH2, C(0)NHRa, C(0)N(Ra)2, alkyl, haloalkyl, C3-C]0 cycloalkyl containing 0-3 Rc, C3-C10 heterocyclyl containing 0-3 Rc, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, C5-Cι0 cycloalkenyl, C5-Cι0 heterocycloalkenyl, C6-C2o aryl containing 0-3 Rd, or C6-C20 heteroaryl containing 0-3 Rj.
Ra is Cι-C6 alkyl optionally substituted with halo, hydroxy, alkoxy, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, sulfate, or phosphate.
Rb is aryl optionally substituted with halo, haloalkyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, nitro, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, sulfate, or phosphate.
Each Rc is independently halo, haloalkyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, oxo, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, sulfate, or phosphate; and
Each R is independently halo, haloalkyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, nitro, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, sulfate, or phosphate.
Embodiments include one or more of the following.
R1 can be C C4 alkyl (e.g., CH3).
R4, R5, R7, and R8 can be H.
R3 can be H.
R6 can be Cι-C6 alkyl.
R6 can be OR9, and R9 can be C C6 alkyl, C5-C8 cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclopentyl or 2-norbornyl), or Cι-C4 alkyl substituted with C3-C5 cycloalkyl.
R6 can be phenyl substituted with R10 (e.g., halo). In certain embodiments, R4 or R5 can be fluoro when R6 is phenyl substituted with R10.
In a further aspect, this invention features a pharmaceutical composition that contains an amount (e.g., an effective amount) of at least one of the compounds described above (e.g., a compound having the formula II and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In certain embodiments, the composition can contain a second antimicrobial agent.
In one aspect, this invention features a method of treating a fungal infection in a subject (including a subject identified as in need of such treatment), the method includes administering an effective amount of a compound (e.g. a compound having the formula II or a pharmaceutical composition described above to the subject. In certain embodiments, the method can include administering a coi ipoύhd dirla"rjΗa hi'aceuticέ[l rJbfrφδsition described above to the subject in combination with a second antimicrobial agent.
Compounds of Formula HI
In a further aspect, this invention features compounds having a formula (HI):
Figure imgf000023_0001
(ffl)
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein, each of Rn and R12 is, independently, H, substituted or unsubstituted Cι-Cι2 alkyl, or substituted or unsubstituted Cι-ι2 alkoxy, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of hydroxy and halo.
R!3 is H, formyl, acetyl, or substituted or unsubstituted C C3 alkyl, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of hydroxy and halo.
Each of R14-R18 is, independently, H, halo, substituted or unsubstituted -Cπ alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C3-C]0 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C2-CI2 alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted C2-Cι2 alkynyl, substituted or unsubstituted C Cι2 alkoxy, substituted or unsubstituted C2- C12 alkenyloxy, substituted or unsubstituted (C2-Cι2 alkynyl)oxy, (C C6 alkyl)oxy(Cι-C6 alkyl), substituted or unsubstituted C6-Cι2 aryloxy, (C3-C6 heteroaryl)-( Cι-C6 alkyl)oxy, (C]-C6 alkyl)thio, substituted or unsubstituted (Cι-C4 alkyl)-thio-( C C alkyl), substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted styryl, substituted or unsubstituted C3-12 heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted C4-8 heterocyclic, -NH-C(0)-NH-(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl), or -NR19R20, wherein each of R19 and R20 is, independently, H or C Cι2 alkyl, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, halo, C C4 alkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C C4 trihaloalkyl, Cι-C6 alkoxy, - trihaloalkoxy, bivalent oxyalkyloxy, acylamino, amino, and azido.
In a further aspect, this invention features a pharmaceutical composition that contains an amount (e.g., an effective amount) of at least one of the compounds described above (e.g. a compound having the fδ'rr uld1 III Md- 'pria nac'eurl'caTly','aoceptable carrier. In certain embodiments, the composition can contain a second antimicrobial agent.
In one aspect, this invention features a method of treating a fungal infection in a subject (including a subject identified as in need of such treatment), the method includes administering an effective amount of a compound (e.g. a compound having the formula III or a pharmaceutical composition described above to the subject. In certain embodiments, the method can include administering a compound or a pharmaceutical composition described above to the subject in combination with a second antimicrobial agent.
Compounds of Formula IV
In one aspect, this invention features compounds having a Formula (IV):
Figure imgf000024_0001
(IV)
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein each of R21 and R22 is, independently, substituted or unsubstituted Cι-C6 alkyl, or substituted or unsubstituted C C6 alkoxy, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of hydroxy and halo.
R is substituted or unsubstituted -Cβ alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C3-C]0 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C6-C]2 aryl, substituted or unsubstituted C3-C(2 heteroaryl, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halo, -C6 alkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, and - trihaloalkyl.
In a further aspect, this invention features a pharmaceutical composition that contains an amount (e.g., an effective amount) of at least one of the compounds described above (e.g. a compound having the formula IV and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In certain embodiments, the composition can contain a second antimicrobial agent. "M' one' asp,elct," is'' feΛdn" features a method of treating a fungal infection in a subject (including a subject identified as in need of such treatment), the method includes administering an effective amount of a compound (e.g. a compound having the formula IV or a pharmaceutical composition described above to the subject. In certain embodiments, the method can include administering a compound or a pharmaceutical composition described above to the subject in combination with a second antimicrobial agent.
Compounds of Formula V
In another aspect, this invention features compounds having a Formula (V):
Figure imgf000025_0001
(V)
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein each of R21 and 22 is, independently, substituted or unsubstituted Cι-C6 alkyl, or substituted or unsubstituted Cι-C6 alkoxy, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of hydroxy and halo.
R23 is substituted or unsubstituted C C6 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C3-Ct0 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C6-C12 aryl, substituted or unsubstituted C3-Cι2 heteroaryl, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halo, -CΘ alkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, and C C6 trihaloalkyl.
In certain embodiments, R21 is CH3 and R23 is CH3, w-hexyl, cyclopentyl, phenyl, 4' -fluorophenyl, or thienyl.
In a further aspect, this invention features a pharmaceutical composition that contains an amount (e.g., an effective amount) of at least one of the compounds described above (e.g. a compound having the formula V and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In certain embodiments, the composition can contain a second antimicrobial agent. lft"dϊϊ'e'"a'sp'fect, ■tHι,s"l erl ϊbn features a method of treating a fungal infection in a subject
(including a subject identified as in need of such treatment), the method mcludes administering an effective amount of a compound (e.g. a compound having the formula V or a pharmaceutical composition described above to the subject. In certain embodiments, the method can include administering a compound or a pharmaceutical composition described above to the subject in combination with a second antimicrobial agent.
Compound of Formula VI
In one aspect, this invention relates to a method of treating a fungal infection in a subject, the method includes administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound having a formula (VI):
Figure imgf000026_0001
(VI) wherein:
R1 is (CH2)nC02H, wherem n is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5;
R1' and R2', independently, are hydrogen or C C6 alkyl, or R1' and R2' together are a bond, R3' and R4', independently, are hydrogen or C C6 alkyl, or R3' and R4' together are a bond, R5' and R6', independently, are hydrogen or - alkyl, or R5 and R6 together are a bond, or R2', R3 , R5 , and R6, independently, are hydrogen or Cι-C6 alkyl and R1 and R4' together are a C1-C3 alkylene group;
each R2, R3, R5, and R6, independently, is hydrogen or Cι-C6 alkyl; and
R4 is: C1-C12 alkyl optionally substituted with C3-C8 cycloalkyl, halo, hydroxy, mercapto, Ci- o alkoxy, C1-C10 thioalkoxy, amino, Cι-CI0 alkylamino, Cι-C]0 dialkylamino, or oxo; C3-C8 cycloalkyl optionally substituted with C3-C8 cycloalkyl, halo, hydroxy, mercapto, -C10 alkoxy, Cι-C10 thioalkoxy, amino, C C)0 alkylamino, Cι-C10 dialkylamino, or oxo; aryl optionally substituted with C3-C8 cycloalkyl, halo, -C10 haloalkyl, hydroxy, mercapto, - o alkoxy, Cι-C10 hydroxyalkyl, Cι-Cι0 thioalkoxy, amino, C Cιo alkylamino, C1- 0 dialkylamino, or acyl; C2-Cι2 alkenyl optionally substituted with C3-C8 cycloalkyl, halo, hydroxy, mercapto, C1-C10 alkoxy, Cr o thioalkoxy, amino, C Cι0 alkylamino, C o dialkylamino, or oxo; or C -Cι2 alkynyl optionally substituted with C3-C8 cycloalkyl, halo, hydroxy, mercapto, -C10 alkoxy, -C10 thioalkoxy, amino, C Cι0 alkylamino, Cj-Cio dialkylamino, or oxo. "jbrntJOdiments caπ,lnc"l ιαe,"drι'e or more of the following.
R1' and R2' together can be a bond, R3' and R4' together can be a bond, and R5' and R6' together can be a bond. In certain embodiments, n can be 0 or 1 and R4 can be C3-C6 alkyl (e.g., «-propyl, iyo-propyl, sec-butyl, «-butyl, ra-pentyl, or ra-hexyi) or R4 can be C3-C6 cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclohexyl).
R2, R3, R5, and R6 can be hydrogen.
R1', R2', R3', R4', R5 , and R6' can be hydrogen, and R1 and R4 can be trans or R1 and R4 can be cis. In certain embodiments, n is 0 and R1 and R4 are trans, R4 being C3-C6 alkyl (e.g., /z-propyl, «-butyl, n- pentyl, or «-hexyl). In other embodiments, the method can further include administering a mixture of the cis isomer of the compound and the trans isomer of the compound. The mixture can include at least about 95 percent of the trans isomer, at least about 98 percent of the trans isomer, or at least about 99 percent of the trans isomer. Alternatively, the mixture can include at least about 95 percent of the cis isomer, at least about 98 percent of the cis isomer, or at least about 99 percent of the cis isomer.
R2', R3', R5', and R6' can be hydrogen, and R1' and R4' together can be a -CH2CH2- group. In certain embodiments, n can be 0 or 1 and R4 can be C3-C6 alkyl (e.g., «-propyl, «-butyl, //-pentyl, or n- hexyl).
n can be 0, 1, 2, or 3.
R4 can be w-propyl, ra-butyl, n-pentyl, or n-hexyl.
R4 can be phenyl.
R4 can be C3-C8 cycloalkyl.
R4 can be C2-C 2 alkenyl.
R4 can be C2-Cι2 alkynyl.
R4 can beC Ci2 alkyl substituted with halo, hydroxy, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, C Cι0 alkoxy, C Cι0 thioalkoxy, amino, -C10 alkylamino, Cj-Cio dialkylamino, or oxo.
The method can further include administering to the subject an antimicrobial agent in combination with the compound. The compound of formula (T) and the antimicrobial agent can be administered simultaneously or sequentially.
The method can further include identifying the subject (e.g., a human subject) as a subject in need of treatment for a fungal infection. ''M'an'όfhefisp'e'ct^mϊS rlVMtfbn relates to a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound having a formula (VI) in an amount effective to treat a fungal infection and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier,
Figure imgf000028_0001
(VI)
wherein:
R1 is (CH2)nC02H, wherein n is 0, 1 , 2, 3 , 4, or 5 ;
R1' and R2 , independently, are hydrogen or C C6 alkyl, or R1 and R2' together are a bond, R3 and R4 , independently, are hydrogen or Cι-C6 alkyl, or R3' and R4' together are a bond, R5' and R6 , independently, are hydrogen or Cι-C6 alkyl, or R5' and R6' together are a bond, or R2', R3', R5', and R6', independently, are hydrogen or Cι-C6 alkyl and R1 and R4 together are a C C3 alkylene group;
each R2, R3, R5, and R6, independently, is hydrogen or Cι-C6 alkyl; and
R4 is: C Cι2 alkyl optionally substituted with C3-C8 cycloalkyl, halo, hydroxy, mercapto, Ci- o alkoxy, Ci-Cio thioalkoxy, amino, Ci- o alkylamino, Cι-C10 dialkylamino, or oxo; C3-C8 cycloalkyl optionally substituted with C3-C8 cycloalkyl, halo, hydroxy, mercapto, Ci- o alkoxy, Cι-C10 thioalkoxy, amino, Cι-C]0 alkylamino, C Cιo dialkylamino, or oxo; aryl optionally substituted with C3-C8 cycloalkyl, halo, Ci-Cio haloalkyl, hydroxy, mercapto, Ci-Cio alkoxy, Ci- o hydroxyalkyl, Cι-Cι0 thioalkoxy, amino, -Cio alkylamino, Cι-Cι0 dialkylamino, or acyl; C2-CJ2 alkenyl optionally substituted with C3-C8 cycloalkyl, halo, hydroxy, mercapto, C Cι0 alkoxy, C Cιo thioalkoxy, amino, -Cio alkylamino, C o dialkylamino, or oxo; or C2-Cι2 alkynyl optionally substituted with C3-C8 cycloalkyl, halo, hydroxy, mercapto, C)-Cι0 alkoxy, Cι-C]0 thioalkoxy, amino, Cι-Cι0 alkylamino, Cι-C10 dialkylamino, or oxo.
Embodiments can include one or more of the following.
R1' and R2' together can be a bond, R3 and R4' together can be a bond, and R5' and R6' together can be a bond. In certain embodiments, n can be 0 or 1 and R4 can be C3-C6 alkyl (e.g., ?z-propyl, ra-butyl, n- pentyl, or ?z-hexyl) or R4 can be C3-C6 cycloalkyl (e.g., cyclohexyl). R", K", K% and R™ can 'be hydrogen.
R1', R2', R3', R4', R5', and R6' can be hydrogen, and R1 and R4 can be trans or R1 and R4 can be cis. In certain embodiments, n can be 0 and R1 and R4 are trans, R4 being C3-C6 alkyl (e.g., n-propyl, 7z-butyl, n-pentyl, or «-hexyl). In other embodiments, the composition can include a mixture of the cis isomer of the compound and the trans isomer of the compound. The mixture can include at least about 95 percent of the trans isomer, at least about 98 percent of the trans isomer, or at least about 99 percent of the trans isomer. Alternatively, the mixture can include at least about 95 percent of the cis isomer, at least about 98 percent of the cis isomer, or at least about 99 percent of the cis isomer.
R2', R3', R5', and R6' are hydrogen, and R1' and R4' together are a -CH2CH2- group. In certain embodiments, n can be 0 or 1 and R4 can be C3-C6 alkyl (e.g., ra-propyl, n-butyl, κ-pentyl, or ra-hexyl).
n can be 0, 1, 2, or 3.
R4 can be κ-propyl, /z-butyl, «-pentyl, or «-hexyl
R4 can be phenyl.
1 R4 can be C3-C8 cycloalkyl.
R4 can be C2-Cι2 alkenyl.
R4 can be C2-Cι2 alkynyl.
R4 can C1-C12 alkyl substituted with halo, hydroxy, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, - o alkoxy, Ci- o thioalkoxy, amino, Ci- o alkylamino, C1-C10 dialkylamino,or oxo.
The composition may further include an antimicrobial agent.
The composition may include a compound in which R1', R2', R3', R4', R5', and R6' can be hydrogen and R1 and R4 can be trans, and may further include an antimicrobial agent, which is also a compound of formula (VI) in which R1 , R2 , R3 , R4 , R5 , and R6' are hydrogen and R1 and R4 are cis.
In a further aspect, this invention features a pharmaceutical composition that contains an amount (e.g., an effective amount) of at least one of the compounds described above (e.g. a compound having the formula (VI)) and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In certain embodiments, the composition can contain a compound having the formula (VI), e.g., an antifungal compound, an antimicrobial agent, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
In one aspect, this invention features a method of treating a fungal infection in a subject (including a subject identified as in need of such treatment), the method includes administering an effective amount of a cόmpoϋ'M"'(e':'g."; a compound having the formula (VI)) or a pharmaceutical composition described above to the subject. In certain embodiments, the method can further include administering a compound or a pharmaceutical composition described above to the subject in combination with an antimicrobial, e.g., antifungal, agent. The compound or pharmaceutical composition and the antimicrobial agent can be administered simultaneously or sequentially.
In one aspect, this invention relates to a pharmaceutical composition including a compound having any of the formulae herein in an amount effective to treat a fungal infection and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In certain embodiments, the composition can include a compound having any of the formulae herein in an amount effective to treat a fungal infection, a second agent (e.g., an antimicrobial agent, a fungicidal agent, a fungistatic agent or an antifungal agent), and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
In another aspect, this invention features a method of inhibiting fungal invasion in a subject (including a subject identified as in need of such treatment), the method includes administering an effective amount of an anti-invasin agent and an antimicrobial agent (e.g., an antifungal agent such as a fungicidal agent or a fungistatic agent) to the subject.
In another aspect, this invention features a method of treating a fungal infection in a subject (including a subject identified as in need of such treatment), the method includes administering an effective amount of a compound having any of the formulae herein in an amount effective to treat a fungal infection or a pharmaceutical composition described above to the subject. In certain embodiments, the method can further include administering a compound or a pharmaceutical composition described above to the subject in combination with an antimicrobial agent, e.g., an antifungal agent that is fungistatic or fungicidal. In some embodiments the compound having any of the formulae described above is an anti-invasin compound that is effective in therapeutic application only in combination wit fa fungicidal agent or a fungistatic agent. The compound or pharmaceutical composition and the antimicrobial agent can be administered simultaneously or sequentially.
In various embodiments of the methods for treating a fungal infection: the antifungal agent is selected from the group consisting of: a polyene, a candin, a sordarin, an azole, an allylamine, a morpholine, and a pradimicin; and the antifungal agent acts by blocking ergosterol synthesis, by interfering with the cell wall, by interfering with the cell membrane, or by interfering with protein translation.
In various embodiments of the compositions: antifungal agent is agent is selected from the group consisting of: a polyene, a candin, a sordarin, an azole, an allylamine, a morpholine, and a pradimicin and the antifungal agent acts by blocking ergosterol synthesis, by interfering with the cell wall, by interfering with the cell membrane, or by interfering with protein translation. ""'" ϊlϊe invention also'''fearufes:''1 a'method of treating a fungal infection in a subject, the method comprising administering an effective amount of an anti-invasin agent and an antifungal agent selected from the group consisting of a polyene, a candin, a sordarin, an azole, an allylamine, a morpholine, and a pradimicin; and a method of treating a fungal infection in a subject, the method comprising administering an effective amount of an anti-invasin agent and an antifungal agent, wherein the antifungal agent acts by blocking ergosterol synthesis, by interfering with the cell wall, by interfering with the cell membrane, or by interfering with protein translation.
In another aspect, the invention features: a pharmaceutical composition comprising an anti- invasin agent and an antifungal agent selected from the group consisting of: a polyene, a candin, a sordarin, an azole, an allylamine, a morpholine, and a pradimicin; and a pharmaceutical composition comprising an anti-invasin agent and an antifungal agent, wherein the antifungal agent acts by blocking ergosterol synthesis, by interfering with the cell wall, by interfering with the cell membrane, or by interfering with protein translation.
In various embodiments of the treatment methods of the invention the anti-invasin agent has greater anti-invasin activity than fungal growth inhibition activity.
In some embodiments of the methods, the anti-invasin agent is characterized as having: a) an IC50 as deteπnined in the HWPl-lacZ reporter assay that is lOOx lower than the MlCgrowth as determined in liquid media; b) a MICinvasιon as determined in the morphology assay that is lOx lower than the MlCgrowt as determined in liquid media; c) a MICinvasion as determined in the plastic adherence assay that is lOx lower than the MlCgro th as determined in liquid media; d) a MICiπvasion as determined in the agar invasion assay that is lOx lower than the MlCgrowth as determined in the agar invasion assay; or e) a MICinvasi0n as determined in the migration across Caco-2 monolayer assay that is lOx lower than the MICgr0Wth as determined in liquid media.
In other embodiments of the methods, the anti-invasin agent is characterized as having: a) an IC50 as determined in the HWPl-lacZ reporter assay that is lOOOx lower than the MlCgrowth as determined in liquid media; b) a MICinvasion as determined in the morphology assay that is lOOx lower than the MlCgro th as determined in liquid media; c) a MICinvas;on as determined in the plastic adherence assay that is lOOx lower than the MlCgrowth as determined in liquid media; d) a MICinVasion as deteπnined in the agar invasion assay that is lOOx lower than the ICgro th as determined in the agar invasion assay; or e) a MIC;nVasion as determined in the migration across Caco-2 monolayer assay that is lOOx lower than the MICgr0wth as determined in liquid media.
Li still other embodiments of the methods, the anti-invasin agent is characterized as having: a) an IC5o as determined in the HWPl-lacZ reporter assay that is lOOOOx lower than the MlCgrowth as determined in liquid media; b) a MIC;nVasion as determined in the moφhology assay that is lOOOx lower than the MlCgrowth as determined in Iϊquid'medϊa; c) a MICinvasion as determined in the plastic adherence assay that is lOOOx lower than the MlCgrowth as determined in liquid media; d) a MICinvasion as determined in the agar invasion assay that is lOOOx lower than the MICgr0wth as determined in the same assay; or e) a MICinvasion as determined in the migration across Caco-2 monolayer assay that is lOOOx lower than the MlCgrowth as determined in liquid media.
In additional embodiments, the invention features a pharmaceutical composition comprising any of the forgoing anti-invasin agents and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. In various embodiments, the pharmaceutical composition further includes: an antifungal agent selected from the group consisting of: a polyene, a candin, a sordarin, an azole, an allylamine, a morpholine, and a pradimicin; or an antifungal agent, wherein the antifungal agent acts by blocking ergosterol synthesis, by interfering with the cell wall, by interfering with the cell membrane, or by interfering with protein translation.
Anti-invasin agents are agents which have anti-invasin activity as measured by one or more of the assays described herein for measuring anti-invasin activity (e.g., the HWPl-lacZ reporter assay, the moφhology assay, the plastic adherence assay, the invasion in agar substrate assay, and the migration across Caco-2 monolayer assay). Certain desirable anti-invasin agents have substantially greater anti- invasin activity than growth inhibition activity, e.g., the MICinVasion is 10X, 20X, 50X, 100X, 200X, 500X, 1000X, 2000X, 5000X or 10000X or more less than the MICgr0Wth when determined in same strain. Thus, certain desirable compounds have significant anti-invasin activity yet have a MlCgrowth that is greater than 3 μg/ml, greater than 4 μg/ml, greater than 5 μg/ml, greater than 6 μg/ml, greater than 8 μg/ml, greater than 10 μg/ml, greater than 12 μg/ml, greater than 15 μg/ml, or even greater than 20 μg/ml.
The subject can be a mammal, preferably a human. In certain embodiments the method can further include identifying a subject having a fungal infection. Identifying a subject in need of such treatment can be in the judgment of a subject or a health care professional and can be subjective (e.g., opinion) or objective (e.g., measurable by a test or diagnostic method).
The term "treating" or "treated" refers to administering a compound described herein to a subject with the puφose to cure, heal, alleviate, relieve, alter, remedy, ameliorate, improve, or affect a disease, e.g., an infection, the symptoms of the disease or the predisposition toward the disease.
"An effective amount" refers to an amount of a compound that confers a therapeutic effect on the treated subject. The therapeutic effect may be objective (i.e., measurable by some test or marker) or subjective (i.e., subject gives an indication of or feels an effect). An effective amount of the compound described above may range from about 0.1 mg/Kg to about 500 mg/Kg, alternatively from about 1 to about 50 mg/Kg. Effective doses will also vary depending on route of administration, as well as the possibility of co-usage with other agents. r "*"" '^he term "Halo" or"''halogen""refers to any radical of fluorine, chlorine, bromine or iodine.
The term "alkyl" refers to a hydrocarbon chain that may be a straight chain or branched chain, containing the indicated number of carbon atoms. For example, C Cι2 alkyl indicates that the group may have from 1 to 12 (inclusive) carbon atoms in it. The term "haloalkyl" refers to an alkyl in which one or more hydrogen atoms are replaced by halo, and includes alkyl moieties in which all hydrogens have been replaced by halo (e.g., perfluoroalkyl). The terms "arylalkyl" or "aralkyl" refer to an alkyl moiety in which an alkyl hydrogen atom is replaced by an aryl group. Aralkyl includes groups in which more than one hydrogen atom has been replaced by an aryl group. Examples of "arylalkyl" or "aralkyl" include benzyl, 2-phenylethyl, 3-phenylpropyl, 9-fluorenyl, benzhydryl, and trityl groups.
The term "alkylene" refers to a divalent alkyl, e.g., -CH2-, -CH2CH2-, and -CH2CH2CH2-.
The term "alkenyl" refers to a straight or branched hydrocarbon chain containing 2-12 carbon atoms and having one or more double bonds. Examples of alkenyl groups include, but are not limited to, allyl, propenyl, 2-butenyl, 3-hexenyl and 3-octenyl groups. One of the double bond carbons may optionally be the point of attachment of the alkenyl substituent. The term "alkynyl" refers to a straight or branched hydrocarbon chain containing 2-12 carbon atoms and characterized in having one or more triple bonds. Examples of alkynyl groups include, but are not limited to, ethynyl, propargyl, and 3-hexynyl. One of the triple bond carbons may optionally be the point of attachment of the alkynyl substituent.
The terms "alkylamino" and "dialkylamino" refer to -NH(alkyl) and -NH(alkyl)2 radicals respectively. The term "aralkylamino" refers to a -NH(aralkyl) radical. The term alkylaminoalkyl refers to a (alkyl)NH-alkyl- radical; the term dialkylaminoalkyl refers to a (alkyl)2N-alkyl- radical The term "alkoxy" refers to an -O-alkyl radical. The term "mercapto" refers to an SH radical. The term "thioalkoxy" refers to an -S-alkyl radical. The term thioaryloxy refers to an -S-aryl radical.
The term "aryl" refers to an aromatic monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic hydrocarbon ring system, wherein any ring atom capable of substitution can be substituted by a substituent. Examples of aryl moieties include, but are not limited to, phenyl, naphthyl, and anthracenyl.
The term "cycloalkyl" as employed herein includes saturated cyclic, bicyclic, tricyclic,or polycyclic hydrocarbon groups having 3 to 12 carbons. Any ring atom can be substituted. The cycloalkyl groups can contain fused rings. Fused rings are rings that share a common carbon atom. Examples of cycloalkyl moieties include, but are not limited to, cyclopropyl, cyclohexyl, methylcyclohexyl, adamantyl, and norbornyl.
The term "heterocyclyl" refers to a nonaromatic 3-10 membered monocyclic, 8-12 membered bicyclic, or 11-14 membered tricyclic ring system having 1-3 heteroatoms if monocyclic, 1-6 heteroatoms if bicyclic, or 1-9 heteroatoms if tricyclic, said heteroatoms selected from O, N, or S (e.g., carbon atoms arid ϊ-3,'1-6, or r-9"'heteroaToms'ofN,'0, or S if monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic, respectively). The heteroatom may optionally be the point of attachment of the heterocyclyl substituent. Any ring atom can be substituted. The heterocyclyl groups can contain fused rings. Fused rings are rings that share a common carbon atom. Examples of heterocyclyl include, but are not limited to, tetrahydrofuranyl, tetrahydropyranyl, piperidinyl, moφholino, pyrrolinyl, pyrimidinyl, quinolinyl, and pyrrolidinyl.
The term "cycloalkenyl" refers to partially unsaturated, nonaromatic, cyclic, bicyclic, tricyclic, or polycyclic hydrocarbon groups having 5 to 12 carbons, preferably 5 to 8 carbons. The unsaturated carbon may optionally be the point of attachment of the cycloalkenyl substituent. Any ring atom can be substituted. The cycloalkenyl groups can contain fused rings. Fused rings are rings that share a common carbon atom. Examples of cycloalkenyl moieties include, but are not limited to, cyclohexenyl, cyclohexadienyl, or norbornenyl.
The term "heterocycloalkenyl" refers to a partially saturated, nonaromatic 5-10 membered monocyclic, 8-12 membered bicyclic, or 11-14 membered tricyclic ring system having 1-3 heteroatoms if monocyclic, 1-6 heteroatoms if bicyclic, or 1-9 heteroatoms if tricyclic, said heteroatoms selected from O, N, or S (e.g., carbon atoms and 1-3, 1-6, or 1-9 heteroatoms of N, O, or S if monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic, respectively). The unsaturated carbon or the heteroatom may optionally be the point of attachment of the heterocycloalkenyl substituent. Any ring atom can be substituted. The heterocycloalkenyl groups can contain fused rings. Fused rings are rings that share a common carbon atom. Examples of heterocycloalkenyl include but are not limited to tetrahydropyridyl and dihydropyranyl. ,
The term "heteroaryl" refers to an aromatic 5-8 membered monocyclic, 8-12 membered bicyclic, or 11-14 membered tricyclic ring system having 1-3 heteroatoms if monocyclic, 1-6 heteroatoms if bicyclic, or 1-9 heteroatoms if tricyclic, said heteroatoms selected from O, N, or S (e.g., carbon atoms and 1-3, 1-6, or 1-9 heteroatoms of N, O, or S if monocyclic, bicyclic, or tricyclic, respectively). Any ring atom can be substituted.
The term "oxo" refers to an oxygen atom, which forms a carbonyl when attached to carbon, an N- oxide when attached to nitrogen, and a sulfoxide or sulfone when attached to sulfur.
The term "acyl" refers to an alkylcarbonyl, cycloalkylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl, heterocyclylcarbonyl, or heteroarylcarbonyl substituent, any of which may be further substituted by substituents.
The term "substituents" refers to a group "substituted" on an alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, heterocyclyl, heterocycloalkenyl, cycloalkenyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group at any atom of that group. Any atom can be substituted. Suitable substituents include, without limitation, alkyl (e.g., Cl, C2, C3, C4, C5, 05, C7,'C8, C9;"CI'0, Cli;'C12'stfaTght or branched chain alkyl), cycloalkyl, haloalkyl (e.g., perfluoroalkyl such as CF3), aryl, heteroaryl, aralkyl, heteroaralkyl, heterocyclyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkenyl, heterocycloalkenyl, alkoxy, haloalkoxy (e.g., perfluoroalkoxy such as OCF3), halo, hydroxy, carboxy, carboxylate, cyano, nitro, amino, alkyl amino, S03H, sulfate, phosphate, methylenedioxy (-0- CH2-0- wherein oxygens are attached to vicinal atoms), ethylenedioxy, oxo, thioxo (e.g., C=S), imino (alkyl, aryl, aralkyl), S(0)nalkyl (where n is 0-2), S(0)n aryl (where n is 0-2), S(0)n heteroaryl (where n is 0-2), S(0)n heterocyclyl (where n is 0-2), amine (mono-, di-, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, heteroaralkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and combinations thereof), ester (alkyl, aralkyl, heteroaralkyl, aryl, heteroaryl), amide (mono-, di-, alkyl, aralkyl, heteroaralkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and combinations thereof), sulfonamide (mono-, di-, alkyl, aralkyl, heteroaralkyl, and combinations thereof). In one aspect, the substituents on a group are independently any one single, or any subset of the aforementioned substituents. In another aspect, a substituent may itself be substituted with any one of the above substituents.
The term "mammal" includes organisms, which include mice, rats, gerbils, cows, sheep, pigs, rabbits, goats, horses, monkeys, dogs, cats, and preferably humans.
The compounds and methods described herein can be used to treat various fungal mycoses.
Mycoses that occur in humans include, without limitation, Actinomycosis, Aspergillosis, Blastomycosis, Candidiasis, Chromomycosis, Coccidioidomycosis, Cryptococcosis, Entomophthoramycosis, Geotrichosis, Histoplasmosis, Mucormycosis, Mycetoma, Nocardiosis, Paracoccidiomycosis, Phaeohyphomycosis, Pneumoscystic pneumonia, Pythiosis, Sporotrichosis, Torulopsosis, Zygomycosis, Chromoblastomycosis, eye infections (e.g., Mycotic keratitis, Endogenous oculomycosis, Extension oculomycosis), Lobomycosis, and Mycetoma. Other syndromes include nail, hair, and skin diseases such as Onychomycosis (Tinea unguium), Piedra, Pityriasis versicolor, Dermatophytosis (e.g., Tinea barbae, Tinea capitis, Tinea coφoris, Tinea cruris, Tinea favosa, Tinea imbricata, Tinea manuum, Tinea nigra, Tinea pedis, and Tinea unguium), Dermatomycosis, Otomycosis, Phycomycosis, Phaeohyphomycosis, Rhinosporidiosis, and Trichomycosis. Mycoses affecting animals include, without limitation,
Aspergillosis, Candidiasis, Chromomycosis, Cryptococcosis, Dermatophytosis, Entomophthoramycosis, Fungal Keratitis, Mucormycosis, Oomycosis, Pythiosis, and Torulopsosis.
Patients most at risk for fungal infections are those with impairment of neutrophil function due to decreased neutrophil production in the bone maπow, increased neutrophil destruction, or qualitative defects in neutrophil function.
Factors that can cause a decrease in neutrophil production include, but are not limited to (1) administration of cytotoxic drugs, including alkylating agents such as cyclophosphamide, busulfan, and chlorambucil, and antimetabolites such as methotrexate, 6-mercaptopurine and 5-flurocytosine; (2) administration of other drugs known to inhibit neutrophil production including, but not limited to, certain antibiotics, phenothiazines, diuretics, anti-inflammatory agents, and antithyroid drugs; (3) bacterial sepsis viral' mfecti hs such" as HiV, EBV or hepatitis; typhoid, malaria, brucellosis, and tularemia; (4) primary hematologic diseases resulting in bone maπow failure, as well as both hereditary syndromes and acquired defects; (5) bone maπow failure due to tumor invasion or myelofϊbrosis; and (6) nutritional deficiencies such as deficiency of either vitamin B 12 or folate.
Factors that can cause an increase in destruction of neutrophils, thereby rendering an individual susceptible to fungal infections, mclude, without limitation, the presence of antineutrophil antibodies, autoimmune disease (such as Felty's syndrome, rheumatoid arthritis, or systemic lupus erythematosis), or idiosyncratic reactions to drugs that, in an idiosyncratic way, act as haptens at the surface of neutrophils, initiating immune destruction of neutrophils.
Qualitative defects in neutrophil function that can lead to increased susceptibility to fungal infections include many disease states, for example, leukocyte adhesion deficiency syndromes, neutrophil chemotactic defects, and neutrophil phagocytic and killing defects.
Neutrophil function is also compromised by administration of corticosteroids used in the treatment of a wide variety of diseases. Thus, patients treated with corticosteroids are at increased risk of fungal infections .
Additional factors increasing individual susceptibility to fungal infections include: (1) treatment with broad spectrum antibiotics, especially in the hospital setting and in Intensive Care settings in particular; (2) application of intravenous catheters, particularly central venous catheters;(3) surgical wounds, particularly those associated with intra-abdo inal surgeries; (4) bone maπow or solid organ transplantation; (5) cancer chemotherapy; (6) Acquired Immune Deficiency Syndrome; (7) Intensive Care Unit stay; and (8) diabetes. In addition, neonates and aged patients are at increased risk.
The compounds described herein can be used alone or in combination with other antimicrobial compounds, including conventional antimicrobial agents such as known antifungal agents for therapeutic or prophylactic treatment of infection or potential infection. Useful antifungal compounds include fungicidal (e.g., Amphotericin) and fungistatic (e.g., Fluconazole) compounds. Whether a given agent is fungicidal or fungistatic can be dependent on the fungal species and other factors such as whether activity is measured in vitro or in vivo. Combination therapies are particularly useful for treatment of infections that respond poorly to single agent therapy and are also useful in the treatment of infections by organisms that exhibit resistance, e.g., acquired or intrinsic resistance, to one or more antifungal agents. Thus, combination therapies can be useful for treatment of infection by an organism that exhibits resistance due to either genetic changes or physiological conditions. Combination therapies are also useful in situations where an effective dose of one or more of the agents used in the combination therapy is associated with undesirable toxicity or side effects when not used in combination. This is because a combination therapy can be used to reduce the required dosage or duration of administration of the individual agents. Ivioreoverj t ie lower dosages' oHen used in a combination therapy may reduce the incidence of acquired resistance to one or more of the agents used in the combination therapy. The individual agents used in combination can act by reducing the growth, replication, viability, invasiveness or virulence of a microbe. Moreover, one or more of the individual agents can act by simply reducing the resistance (or increasing the sensitivity) of the microbe to one or more other agents used in the combination.
Among the agents that can be used in combination therapy are polyenes (e.g., Amphotericin B, Mepartricin, Nystatin, Pimaricin, SPA-S-843), candins (e.g., Anidulafungin, Caspofungin, Micofungin, and Cilofungin, V-echinocandin), aminocandins, sordarins (e.g., Azasordarin, GM 222712, GM 237354), azoles (e.g., Azoline, Albaconazole, bal 8557, Bifonazole, Butoconazole, Clotrimazole, Croconazole, CS- 758, Eberconazole, Econazole, Fenticonazole, Fluconazole, Flutrimazole, Fosfluconazole, Isoconazole, Itraconazole, Ketoconazole, Ianoconazole, Miconazole, Neticonazole, Oxiconazole, Posaconazole, PR- 2699, Propenidazole, Ravuconazole, Sertaconazole, SSY-726, Sulconazole, Terconazole, Tioconazole, and Voriconazole), allylamines (e.g., Butenafine, Naftifme, Terbinafϊne), moφholines (e.g., amorolfine), pradimicins (e.g., BMS-181184), and other antifungals (e.g., Alpha interferon; Amantanium bromide; aminopyridine; amphotech; α-MSH (melanocyte stimulating hormone) peptide; BAY-10-8888 PLD-118; |8-(l,6)-glucan synthesis inhibitors; Ciclopirox; Cyclopiroxalamine; DB-289; ECO-02301; ECO-14401; Exalamide; Flucytosine; Fumagiline; Griseofulvin; Haloprogin; Iseganan; Liranaftate; Natamycin; Nikkomycin; Siccanin; Tolciclate; Undecylenate; Zadaxin; beta-amino acids, e.g., PLD-118 or derivatives thereof).
The antifungal agent can act, for example, by blocking ergosterol synthesis (e.g., azoles or allylamines), by interfering with the cell wall (e.g., candins), by interfering with the cell membrane (polyenes) or by interfering with protein translation (e.g., sordarins).
Combination therapy can be achieved by administering two or more agents, each of which is formulated and administered separately, or by administering two or more agents in a single formulation. Other combinations are also encompassed by combination therapy. For example, two agents can be formulated together and administered in conjunction with a separate formulation containing a third agent. While the two or more agents in the combination therapy can be administered simultaneously, they need not be. For example, administration of a first agent (or combination of agents) can precede administration of a second agent (or combination of agents) by minutes, hours, days, or weeks. Thus, the two or more agents can be administered within minutes of each other or within 1, 2, 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, or 24 hours of each other or within 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 14 days of each other or within 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 weeks of each other. In some cases even longer intervals are possible. While in many cases it is desirable that the two or more agents used in a combination therapy be present in within the patient's body at the same time, this need not be so. Combination therapy 'can also include two or more administrations of one or more of the agents used in the combination. For example, if agent X and agent Y are used in a combination, one could administer them sequentially in any combination one or more times, e.g., in the order X-Y-X, X-X-Y, Y- X-Y, Y-Y-X, X-X-Y-Y, etc.
5 The antifungal agents, alone or in combination, can be combined with any pharmaceutically acceptable caπier or medium. Thus, they can be combined with materials that do not produce an adverse, allergic or otherwise unwanted reaction when administered to a patient. The carriers or mediums used can include solvents, dispersants, coatings, absoφtion promoting agents, controlled release agents, and one or more inert excipients (which include starches, polyols, granulating agents, microcrystalline cellulose, diluents, 0 lubricants, binders, disintegrating agents, and the like), etc. If desired, tablet dosages of the disclosed compositions may be coated by standard aqueous or nonaqueous techniques.
Compositions of the present invention may also optionally include other therapeutic ingredients, anti-caking agents, preservatives, sweetening agents, colorants, flavors, desiccants, plasticizers, dyes, and the like. Any such optional ingredient must be compatible with the compound of the invention to insure 5 the stability of the formulation.
The composition may contain other additives as needed, including for exanple lactose, glucose, fructose, galactose, trehalose, sucrose, maltose, raffinose, maltitol, melezitose, stachyose, lactitol, palatinite, starch, xylitol, mannitol, myoinositol, and the like, and hydrates thereof, and amino acids, for example alanine, glycine and betaine, and peptides and proteins, for example albumen.
0 Examples of excipients for use as the pharmaceutically acceptable carriers and. the pharmaceutically acceptable inert carriers and the aforementioned additional ingredients include, but are not limited to binders, fillers, disintegrants, lubricants, anti-microbial agents, and coating agents such as:
BINDERS: corn starch, potato starch, other starches, gelatin, natural and synthetic gums such as !5 acacia, sodium alginate, alginic acid, other alginates, powdered tragacanth, guar gum, cellulose and its derivatives (e.g., ethyl cellulose, cellulose acetate, carboxymethyl cellulose calcium, sodium carboxymethyl cellulose), polyvinyl pyπolidone, methyl cellulose, pre-gelatinized starch (e.g., STARCH 1500® and STARCH 1500 LM®, sold by Colorcon, Ltd.), hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose, microcrystalline cellulose (e.g. AVICEL™, such as, AVICEL-PH-101™, -103™ and -105™, sold by D FMC Coφoration, Marcus Hook, PA, USA), or mixtures thereof,
FILLERS: talc, calcium carbonate (e.g., granules or powder), dibasic calcium phosphate, tribasic calcium phosphate, calcium sulfate (e.g., granules or powder), microcrystalline cellulose, powdered "cellulose, dexfrates, kaolm™maϊώιtόl, silicic acid, sorbitol, starch, pre-gelatinized starch, or mixtures thereof,
DISINTEGRANTS: agar-agar, alginic acid, calcium carbonate, microcrystalline cellulose, croscarmellose sodium, crospovidone, polacrilin potassium, sodium starch glycolate, potato or tapioca starch, other starches, pre-gelatinized starch, clays, other algins, other celluloses, gums, or mixtures thereof,
LUBRICANTS: calcium stearate, magnesium stearate, mineral oil, light mineral oil, glycerin, sorbitol, mannitol, polyethylene glycol, other glycols, stearic acid, sodium lauryl sulfate, talc, hydrogenated vegetable oil (e.g., peanut oil, cottonseed oil, sunflower oil, sesame oil, olive oil, corn oil and soybean oil), zinc stearate, ethyl oleate, ethyl laurate, agar, syloid silica gel (AEROSIL 200, W.R. Grace Co., Baltimore, MD USA), a coagulated aerosol of synthetic silica (Deaussa Co., Piano, TX USA), a pyrogenic silicon dioxide (CAB-O-SIL, Cabot Co., Boston, MA USA), or mixtures thereof,
ANTI-CAKING AGENTS: calcium silicate, magnesium silicate, silicon dioxide, colloidal silicon dioxide, talc, or mixtures thereof,
ANTIMICROBIAL AGENTS: benzalkonium chloride, benzethonium chloride, benzoic acid, benzyl alcohol, butyl paraben, cetylpyridinium chloride, cresol, chlorobutanol, dehydroacetic acid, ethylparaben, methylparaben, phenol, phenylethyl alcohol, phenoxyethanol, phenylmercuric acetate, phenylmercuric nitrate, potassium sorbate, propylparaben, sodium benzoate, sodium dehydroacetate, sodium propionate, sorbic acid, thimersol, thymo, or mixtures thereof, and COATING AGENTS: sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, cellulose acetate phthalate, ethylcellulose, gelatin, pharmaceutical glaze, hydroxypropyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose phthalate, methylcellulose, polyethylene glycol, polyvinyl acetate phthalate, shellac, sucrose, titanium dioxide, carnauba wax, microcrystalline wax, or mixtures thereof.
Antifungal agents can be administered, e.g., by intravenous injection, intramuscular injection, subcutaneous injection, or by other routes. They can be injected or otherwise introduced (e.g., via catheter or direct placement) at a site of infection or potential injection. The agents can be administered orally, e.g., as a tablet or cachet containing a predetermined amount of the active ingredient, pellet, gel, paste, syrup, bolus, electuary, slurry, capsule; powder; granules; as a solution or a suspension in an aqueous liquid or a non-aqueous liquid; as an oil-in-water liquid emulsion or a water-in-oil liquid emulsion, via a liposomal formulation (see, e.g., EP 736299) or in some other form.. Orally administered compositions can include binders, flavoring agents, and humectants. The agents can be included in dentifrices or oral washes. Thus, oral formulations can include abrasives and foaming agents. The agents can also be administered transdermally, parenterally, or in the form a suppository. They can also be administered in eyedrops. Antifungal agents can"be"a"ffee acid or base, or a pharmacologically acceptable salt thereof. Solids can be dissolved or dispersed immediately prior to administration or earlier. In some circumstances the preparations include a preservative to prevent the growth of microorganisms. The pharmaceutical forms suitable for injection can include sterile aqueous or organic solutions or dispersions which include, e.g., water, an alcohol, an organic solvent, an oil or other solvent or dispersant (e.g., glycerol, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol, and vegetable oils). The formulations may contain antioxidants, buffers, bacteriostats, and solutes that render the formulation isotonic with the blood of the intended recipient, and aqueous and non-aqueous sterile suspensions that can include suspending agents, solubilizers, thickening agents, stabilizers, and preservatives. Pharmaceutical agents can be sterilized by filter sterilization or by other suitable means.
The agents either in their free form or as a salt can be combined with a polymer such as polylactic-glycoloic acid (PLGA), ρoly-(I)-lactic-glycolic-tartaric acid (P(l)LGT) (WO 01/12233), polyglycolic acid (U.S. 3,773,919), polylactic acid (U.S.4,767,628), poly(ε-caprolactone) and poly(alkylene oxide) (U.S. 20030068384) to create a sustained release formulation. Such formulations can be used to implants that release a compound of the invention or another agent over a period of a few days, a few weeks or several months depending on the polymer, the particle size of the polymer, and the size of the implant (see, e.g., U.S. 6,620,422). Other sustained release formulations are described in EP 0 467 389 A2, WO 93/241150, U.S. 5,612,052, WO 97/40085, WO 03/075887, WO 01/01964A2, U.S. 5,922,356, WO 94/155587, WO 02/074247A2, WO 98/25642, U.S. 5,968,895, U.S. 6,180,608, U.S. 20030171296, U.S. 20020176841, U.S. 5,672,659, U.S. 5,893,985, U.S. 5,134,122, U.S. 5,192,741, U.S. 5,192,741, U.S. 4,668,506, U.S. 4,713,244, U.S. 5,445,832 U.S.4,931,279, U.S. 5,980,945, WO 02/058672, WO 9726015, WO 97/04744, and. US20020019446. Tn such sustained release formulations microparticles of peptide are combined with microparticles of polymer. One or more sustained release implants can be used. U.S. 6,011,011 and WO 94/06452 describe a sustained release formulation providing either polyethylene glycols (where PEG 300 and PEG 400 are most prefeπed) or triacetin. WO 03/053401 describes a formulation which may both enhance bioavailability and provide controlled release of the agent within the GI tract. Additional controlled release formulations are described in WO 02/38129, EP 326 151, U.S. 5,236,704, WO 02/30398, WO 98/13029; U.S. 20030064105, U.S. 20030138488A1, U.S. 20030216307A1 J.S. 6,667,060, WO 01/49249, WO 01/49311, WO 01/49249, WO 01/49311, and U.S. 5,877,224.
The agents can be administered, e.g., by intravenous injection, intramuscular injection, subcutaneous injection, intraperitoneal injection, topical, sublingual, intraarticular (in the joints), intradermal, buccal, ophthalmic (including intraocular), intranasaly (including using a cannula), or by other routes. The agents can be administered orally, e.g., as a tablet or cachet containing a predetermined amount of the active ingredient, gel, pellet, paste, syrup, bolus, electuary, slurry, capsule, powder, granules, as a solution or a suspension in an aqueous liquid or a non-aqueous liquid, as an oil-in-water liquiff emulsion or a wafer- -δϊrHqϊSS emulsion, via a micellar formulation (see, e.g. WO 97/11682) via a liposomal formulation (see, e.g., EP 736299,WO 99/59550 and WO 97/13500), via formulations described in WO 03/094886 or in some other form. Orally administered compositions can include binders, lubricants, inert diluents, lubricating, surface active or dispersing agents, flavoring agents, and humectants. Orally administered formulations such as tablets may optionally be coated or scored and may be formulated so as to provide sustained, delayed or controlled release of the active ingredient therein. The agents can also be administered transdermally (i.e. via reservoir-type or matrix-type patches, microneedles, thermal poration, hypodermic needles, iontophoresis, electroporation, ultrasound or other forms of sonophoresis, jet injection, or a combination of any of the preceding methods (Prausnitz et al. 2004, Nature Reviews Drug Discovery 3:115-124)). The agents can be administered using high-velocity transdermal particle injection techniques using the hydrogel particle formulation described in U.S. 20020061336. Additional particle formulations are described in WO 00/45792, WO 00/53160, and WO 02/19989. An example of a transdermal formulation containing plaster and the absoφtion promoter dimethylisosorbide can be found in WO 89/04179. WO 96/11705 provides formulations suitable for transdermal adminisitration. The agents can be administered in the form a suppository or by other vaginal or rectal means. The agents can be administered in a transmembrane formulation as described in WO 90/07923. The agents can be administed non-invasively via the dehydrated particicles described in U.S. 6,485,706. The agent can be administered in an enteric-coated drug formulation as described in WO 02/49621. The agents can be administered intranassaly using the formulation described in U.S. 5,179,079. Formulations suitable for parenteral injection are described in WO 00/62759. The agents can be administered using the casein formulation described in U. S. 20030206939 and WO 00/06108. The agents can be administered using the particulate formulations described in U.S. 20020034536.
The agents, alone or in combination with other suitable components, can be administered by pulmonary route utilizing several techniques including but not limited to intratracheal instillation (delivery of solution into the lungs by syringe), intratracheal delivery of liposomes, insufflation
(administration of powder formulation by syringe or any other similar device into the lungs) and aerosol inhalation. Aerosols (e.g., jet or ultrasonic nebulizers, metered-dose inhalers (MDIs), and dry-powder inhalers (DPIs)) can also be used in intranasal applications. Aerosol formulations are stable dispersions or suspensions of solid material and liquid droplets in a gaseous medium and can be placed into pressurized acceptable propellants, such as hydrofluroalkanes (HFAs, i.e. HFA-134a and HFA-227, or a mixture thereof), dichlorodifluoromethane (or other chlorofluocarbon propellants such as a mixture of Propellants 11, 12, and/or 114), propane, nitrogen, and the like. Pulmonary formulations may include permeation enhancers such as fatty acids, and saccharides, chelating agents, enzyme inhibitors (e.g., protease inhibitors), adjuvants (e.g., glycocholate, surfactin, span 85, and nafamostat), preservatives (e.g., benzalkonium chloride or chlorobutanol), and ethanol (normally up to 5% but possibly up to 20%, by weight). Ethanol is commonly included in aerosol compositions as it can improve the function of the metering valve and in some cases also improve the stability of the dispersion. Pulmonary formulations may "also include surfactants which mclude but are not limited to bile salts and those described in U.S. 6,524,557 and references therein. The surfactants described in U.S. 6,524,557, e.g., a C8-C16 fatty acid salt, a bile salt, a phospholipid, or alkyl saccaride are advantageous in that some of them also reportedly enhance absoφtion of the peptide in the formulation. Also suitable in the invention are dry powder formulations comprising a therapeutically effective amount of active compound blended with an appropriate carrier and adapted for use in connection with a dry-powder inhaler. Absoφtion enhancers which can be added to dry powder formulations of the present invention include those described in U.S. 6,632,456. WO 02/080884 describes new methods for the surface modification of powders. Aerosol formulations may include U.S. 5,230,884, U.S. 5,292,499, WO 017/8694, WO 01/78696, U.S. 2003019437, U. S. 20030165436, and WO 96/40089 (which includes vegetable oil). Sustained release formulations suitable for inhalation are described in U.S. 20010036481A1, 20030232019A1, and U.S. 20040018243A1 as well as in WO 01/13891, WO 02/067902, WO 03/072080, and WO 03/079885. Pulmonary formulations containing microparticles are described in WO 03/015750, U.S. 20030008013, and WO 00/00176. Pulmonary formulations containing stable glassy state powder are described in U.S. 20020141945 and U.S. 6,309,671. Other aerosol formulations are desribed in EP 1338272A1 WO 90/09781, U. S. 5,348,730, U.S. 6,436,367, WO 91/04011, and U.S. 6,294,153 and U.S. 6,290,987 - describes a liposomal based formulation that can be administered via aerosol or other means. Powder formulations for inhalation are described in U.S. 20030053960 and WO 01/60341. The agents can be administered intranasally as described in U.S. 20010038824.
Solutions of medicament in buffered saline and similar vehicles are commonly employed to generate an aerosol in a nebulizer. Simple nebulizers operate on Bernoulli's principle and employ a stream of air or oxygen to generate the spray particles. More complex nebulizers employ ultrasound to create the spray particles. Both types are well known in the art and are described in standard textbooks of pharmacy such as Sprowls' American Pharmacy and Remington's The Science and Practice of Pharmacy. Other devices for generating aerosols employ compressed gases, usually hydrofluorocarbons and chlorofluorocarbons, which are mixed with the medicament and any necessary excipients in a pressurized container, these devices are likewise described in standard textbooks such as Sprowls and Remington.
" The agent can be fused to immunoglobulins or albumin, or incoφorated into a lipsome to improve half-life. The agent can also be conjugated to polyethylene glycol (PEG) chains. Methods for pegylation and additional formulations containing PEG-conjugates (i.e. PEG-based hydrogels, PEG modified liposomes) can be found in Harris and Chess, Nature Reviews Drug Discovery 2: 214-221 and the references therein. The agent can be administered via a nanocochleate or cochleate delivery vehicle (BioDelivery Sciences International). The agents can be delivered transmucosally (i.e. across a mucosal surface such as the vagina, eye or nose) using formulations such as that described in U.S. 5,204,108. The agents can be formulated in microcapsules as described in WO 88/01165. The agent can be administered intra-orally using the formulations described in U.S. 20020055496, WO 00/47203, and U.S. 6,495,120. The agent can be delivered using nanoemulsion formulations described in WO 01/91728A2.
Methods to increase chemical and/or physical stability of the agents the described herein are found in WO 00/04880, and WO 97/04796 and the references cited therein.
Methods to increase bioavailability of the agents described herein are found in U.S. 20030198619, WO 01/49268, WO 00/32172, and WO 02/064166. Glycyrrhizinate can also be used as an absoφtion enhancer (see, e.g., EP397447). WO 03/004062 discusses Ulex europaeus I (UEA1) and. UEAI mimetics which may be used to target the agents of the invention to the GI tract.
Suitable pharmaceutical compositions in accordance with the invention will generally include an amount of the active compound(s) with an acceptable pharmaceutical diluent or excipient, such as a sterile aqueous solution, to give a range of final concentrations, depending on the intended use. The techniques of preparation are generally well known in the art, as exemplified by Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18th Ed., Mack Publishing Company, 1995.
A prophylactically effective amount of a compound is an amount that, in a given dosage regime, reduces the frequency or severity of infection by a fungal pathogen compared to treatment with a placebo. A therapeutically effective amount of a compound is an amount that, in a given dosage regime, results in improved therapeutic outcome (e.g., reduces manifestations or impact of infection). In the context of a combination therapy, a therapeutically effective amount is one which results in improved therapeutic outcome compared to one agent used alone. A therapeutically effective amount may also reduce the fungal bioburden within a patient and/or reduces the time to reduce the fungal bioburden to a lower level compared to treatment with a placebo and/or improves therapeutic outcome. By "fungal bioburden" is meant the number of fungal cells or spores per unit of sample (e.g., the number of cells or spores per gram of tissue). The number of cells can be determined by methods including, but not limited to, calculation of fungal biomass, PCR signal with fungal-specific primers, hybridization, histologic examination, detection of fungal metabolites or products, and plating for colony forming units. Specific methods can be more or less applicable depending on the "characteristics of the organism and the treatment. Improved therapeutic outcome can be assessed by a variety of measures including increased survival rate, reduced percentage of culture-positive body fluid samples (e.g., blood, urine, sputum), reduced rate of x-ray findings consistent with infection (e.g., chest x-ray, body CT scan), and reduced number of days with fever. Therapeutically effective doses can be determined using an animal model or via clinical studies. Experimental animals suffering from a microbial infection are often used to determine an initial therapeutic regime that can be further verified in human clinical trials according to standard testing methods. The activity of compounds in vivo and the likely useful dosage for human patients can be determined using various animal models including those that are described by Abruzzo et al. (Antimicrobial Agents and Chemotherapy 44:2310 (2000)); Bowan et al. (Antimicrobial Agents and Chemotherapy 45:3474 (2001)); Kirkpatrick et al. (Antimicrobial Agents and Chemotherapy 46:2564 (2002)); and Odds et al. (Antimicrobial Agents and Chemotherapy 44:3180 (2000)).
The agents described herein and combination therapy agents can be packaged as a kit that includes single or multiple doses of two or more agents, each packaged or formulated individually, or single or multiple doses of two or more agents packaged or formulated in combination. Thus, one or more agents can be present in first container, and the kit can optionally include one or more agents in a second container. The container or containers are placed within a package, and the package can optionally include administration or dosage instructions. A kit can include additional components such as syringes or other means for administering the agents as well as diluents or other means for formulation.
For agricultural uses, the compositions or agents identified using the methods disclosed herein may be used as chemicals applied as sprays or dusts on the foliage of plants, or in irrigation systems. Typically, such agents are to be administered on the surface of the plant in advance of the pathogen in order to prevent infection. Seeds, bulbs, roots, tubers, and corms are also treated to prevent pathogenic attack after planting by controlling pathogens carried on them or existing in the soil at the planting site. Soil to be planted with vegetables, ornamentals, shrubs, or trees can also be treated for control of a variety of microbial pathogens. Treatment is preferably done several days or weeks before planting. The chemicals can be applied by either a mechanized route, e.g., a tractor, or with hand applications. In addition, chemicals identified using the methods of the assay can be used as disinfectants.
In addition, the compounds described herein can be coated onto or integrated into materials used to make catheters, including but not limited to intravenous, urinary, intraperitoneal, ventricular, spinal and surgical drainage catheters, and other medical devices in order to prevent colonization and systemic seeding by potential pathogens. Similarly, the compounds described herein may be coated onto or integrated into materials that constitute various surgical prostheses and to dentures to prevent colonization by pathogens and thereby prevent more serious invasive infection or systemic seeding by pathogens. It wiirbe recognized' that "the compounds of this invention can exist in radiolabeled form, i.e., the compounds may contain one or more atoms containing an atomic mass or mass number different from the atomic mass or mass number usually found in nature. Radioisotopes of hydrogen, carbon, phosphorous, fluorine, iodine and chlorine include 3H, 1 C, 35S, 32P, 18F, 125I and 36C1, respectively. Compounds that contain those radioisotopes and/or other radioisotopes of other atoms are within the scope of this invention. Tritiated, i.e. 3H, and carbon-14, i.e., 1 C, radioisotopes are particularly prefeπed for their ease in preparation and detectability. Radiolabeled compounds of this invention and prodrugs thereof can generally be prepared by methods well known to those skilled in the art. Conveniently, such radiolabeled compounds can be prepared by carrying out the procedures disclosed in the Examples and Schemes by substituting a readily available radiolabeled reagent for a non-radiolabeled reagent.
The details of one or more embodiments of the invention are set forth in the accompanying drawings and the description below. Other features, objects, and advantages of the invention will be apparent from the description and drawings, and from the claims.
DESCRIPTION OF DRAWINGS
FIG. 1A is a table of representative compounds and anti-fungal activity data for compounds of formulas (A), (O), (L), (E), (C), (AA), (AB), (K), and (R).
FIG. IB is a table of representative compounds and anti-fungal activity data for compounds of formula (AA).
FIG. 2 is a summary of representative compounds and anti-fungal activity data for compounds of formulas: (T), (π), (III), (TV), and (V).
FIG. 3 is a listing of representative compounds of formula (VI).
FIG. 4 is a schematic showing a synthesis of a precursor to compounds having formula H".
FIG. 5 is a schematic showing a synthesis of compounds having formula H".
FIG. 6 is a table of representative compounds and anti-fungal activity data for compounds of formula (VI).
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
COMPOUNDS OF FORMULAS: (A). (O), CL). (E). (C (AA). (AB). (K). AND CR)
Among the compounds that can be used in practicing the invention are those that contain nitrogenous heterocyclic moieties and have one of the general formulae shown below.
Figure imgf000046_0001
Figure imgf000046_0002
(L) (C)
Figure imgf000046_0003
(AB) (R) ( )
Compounds having formula (A) can include cyclic ("B" is present, dashed lines are bonds) or acyclic (B is absent, dashed lines are unshared electron pairs) compounds. A prefeπed subset of formula (A) compounds is represented by formula (A-I). One or more of R1, R2, R3,
Figure imgf000047_0001
and R4 may be halo, hydroxy, alkoxy, nitro, amino, cyano,carboxy, Cι-C6 alkyl, C6-C]0 aryl, or 5-8 membered heteroaryl. Re can be Cι-Cl2 alkyl, C7-Cι6 aralkyl, C6-Cι0 aryl, or C6-C10 arylamino. Prefeπed Re substituents include unbranched C5-Cn alkyl, alkoxy-substituted anilino, halo-substituted benzyl, and alkyl-substituted phenyl. Rb can be (CH3)2NCH2CH2, benzyl, or branched or unbranched C,-C6 alkyl. R9 can be phenyl, preferably substituted with halo and/or alkyl, and n can be 0-2.
Compounds having formula (O) may contain a substituted or unsubstituted piperazine core (e.g., with Cι-C4 alkyl; Cι-C alkoxy; or halo, preferably fluoro). R1 and R2 each can be -Cι2 alkyl; C7-Ci6 aralkyl; C2-Cι2 alkenyl, optionally substituted with aryl; C3-C8 cycloalkyl, optionally substituted with C C4 alkyl; or RaC(0)-, and all combinations of these substituents are expressly included in this invention. In certain embodiments, one of R1 and R2 can be aralkyl (e.g., benzyl, -(CH2)2Ph, or-(CH2)3Ph) or alkenyl (e.g., 3-phenylallyl). In other embodiments, both of R1 and R2 can be aralkyl, and the two aralky groups may be the same or different. In still other embodiments, one of R1 and R2 is aralkyl and the other is alkenyl.
Compounds having formula (E) may have substituted or unsubstituted C7-C]6 aralkyl (e.g., benzyl), substituted or unsubstituted C6-C10 aryloxy, or an exocyclic double bond at C-4 of the piperidine ring. The remaining ring carbons may be substituted or unsubstituted (e.g., with Cι-C4 alkyl; C C alkoxy; or halo, preferably fluoro). R1 can be Cι-Cι2 alkyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 substituents; C7-Ci6 aralkyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 substituents; 6-16 membered heteroaralkyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 substituents; C2-Cι2 alkenyl, optionally substituted with 1-2 substituents; C6-Cι0 arylsulfonyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 substituents; -NHC(0)Rb; or C(0)Rc. Rb can be C6-Cl0 aryl or 5-8 membered heteroaryl; and Rc can be C6-C10 aryl, optionally substituted with C C4 alkyl. Substituents may be the same or different and may be selected from halo; hydroxy, C C6 alkyl; - alkoxy; C6-Cι0 aryloxy, optionally substituted with halo; 5-8 membered heteroaryl, optionally substituted " wTthU C4 "alkyl; C6-C1 'o'airyr,"optiόιιally substituted with C2-C6 dialkylamino or methylenedioxo; C7-C16 aralkoxy; allyloxy; alkylaminocarbonyl; dialkylaminocarbonyl. Prefeπed R1 substituents include C C4 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted benzyl, or substituted or unsubstituted 6-membered heteroaralkyl, wherein the substituents are selected from Cj-C2 alkoxy, benzyloxy, allyloxy, F, Br, (CH3)2N, CH3, methylenedioxo, or (CH3)2CHNHC(0)-.
Compounds having formula (L) include 4-acyl, carboxy or alkoxycarbonyl [e.g., C(0)OR] substituted piperidines (A = CH) or 4-acyl or alkoxycarbonyl substituted piperazines (A = N). The remaining ring carbons may be substituted or unsubstituted (e.g., with C C4 alkyl; C C4 alkoxy; or halo, preferably fluoro). R1 can be C1- 2 alkyl, C2-Cπ alkenyl, 5-10 membered heteroaryl, or RaC(0)-, preferably R1 is C3-C10 alkenyl (e.g, -(CH2)6CH=CH2).
Compounds having formula (C) may contain a cyclohexyl ring (A = CH2) or a piperidine (A =NR7) ring fused to the five-membered ring of the indole core. One or more of R1, R2, R3, and R4 may be halo, hydroxy, alkoxy, nitro, amino, cyano, carboxy, - alkyl, C6-Cι0 aryl, or 5-8 membered heteroaryl. R5 can be hydrogen, optionally substituted aryl sulfonyl (e.g., p-tolyϊ), Cι-C6 alkyl, or Cι-C6 alkoxycarbonyl. R6 can be hydrogen; C C6 alkylamino, optionally substituted with 1-3 substituents; C6- C10 aryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 substituents; or C5-C10 heteroaryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 substituents. Substituents may be the same or different and may include halo; methylenedioxo; C6-Cι0 aryloxy, optionally substituted with halo; or Cι-C4 alkoxy. R7 can be hydrogen; C7-Cl6 aralkyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 -C4 alkyl or C C4 alkoxy; or -C(0)Rd. Rd can be C6-Cι0 aryl, optionally substituted with halo or C C4 alkyl; 5-8 membered heteroaryl; 3-8 membered heterocyclyl; or 5-10 membered heterocycloalkenyl. In certain embodiments, R6 and R7 together are 3-8 membered heterocyclyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 substituents, which may be the same or different and may include hydroxy, oxo, or C C6 alkyl.
Compounds having formula (AA) may contain a phenyl or thienyl ring fused to the pyrimidine ring. The fused phenyl or thienyl ring may be optionally substituted with 1-3 substituents, which may be the same or different and include halo, Cι-C6 alkyl, fused C5-C7 cycloalkyl, or C6-Cι0 aryl. A can be halo; -NHR3; -OR4; or C3-C8 heteroaryl, optionally substituted with substituted C6 arylsulfonyl, preferably A is NR3. R3 and R4 each can be Cj-C12 alkyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 substituents or C7-Cι6 aralkyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 substituents. Substituents may be the same or different and may include halo, Cι-C4 alkoxy (e.g, OCH3), methylenedioxo, or dialkylamino (e.g, dimethylamino).
Compounds of formula (AB) may have one of the piperazine nitrogens attached to a 6-10 membered heteroaryl (pyridine, pyrimidine, quinoline, etc.). Any one of the ring atoms of the 6-10 membered heteroaryl may be the point of attachment. The heteroaryl group may be substituted with 1-3 substituents, which may be the same or different and include , halo; C6-Cιo aryl, optionally substituted with halo, hydroxy, or -C4 alkoxy; C C4 alkoxycarbonyl; or Cι-C4 alkyl. The other piperazine nitrogen may be unsubstituted or substituted with C6-Cj0 arylsulfonyl, optionally substituted with halo; C]-Cl2 alkyl; -C(0)Rb;or C7-C16 aralkyl. Rb can be NHRC; 5-10 membered heteroaryl; or C6-Cl0 aryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 C,-C4 alkoxy. Rc can be C6-C]0 aryl and may contain 1-3 halo.
Compounds having formula (K) contain an amino substituent at C-4 of the piperidine ring. The remaining ring carbons may be substituted or unsubstituted (e.g, with C C4 alkyl; C C4 alkoxy; -C4 alkoxycarbonyl; or halo, prefereably fluoro). R1 can be C Cι2 alkyl, C7-Cl6 aralkyl, or -C(0)Ra; Ra can be Cι-C6 alkyl or Cι-C alkoxy. Preferably R1 is C C5 alkyl (e.g, methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl or isobutyl) or C7-C8 aralkyl (e.g, benzyl or 2-phenylethyl). R2 and R2' can each be hydrogen; - alkyl; C3-C8 cycloalkyl; -C(0)Rb; substituted or unsubstituted C7-C]6 aralkyl; or substituted or unsubstituted 6- 16 membered heteroaralkyl; Rbcan be substituted or unsubstituted aryl. All combinations of the above substituents forR2 and R2' are expressly included in this invention. In certain embodiments, R2 and R2' together are 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, optionally substituted with 1-5 C,-C4 alkyl. Substitutents may be the same or different and may include C6-Cl0 aryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 Rd; C6-C,0 aryloxy, optionally substituted with 1-3 Rd; C3-C8 cycloalkyl -Cι-C alkoxy; C6-Cι0 arylamino, optionally substituted with 1-3 Rd; C6-Cl0 thioaryloxy, optionally substituted with 1-3 Rd; or C7-C16 aralkoxy, optionally substituted with 1-3 Rd; each Rd is, independently, halo, Cι-C6 alkyl, Cι-C4 alkoxy, or C C4 haloalkyl.
Compounds having formula (R) contain a disubstituted bicycloamino core in which a nitrogen occupies a bridgehead position. R1 can be hydrogen, C C6 alkyl, C2-C6 alkenyl, or C7-Cι6 aralkoxy; preferably R1 is ethyl or vinyl. R2 and R2 can each be hydrogen or CHR3R4. The carbon to which R3 and R4 is attached is a stereogenic carbon and may have either the R or the S configuration. R3 can be C5-Cl4 heteroaryl, optionally substituted with - alkoxy; R4 can be OR5; and R5 can be hydrogen, C6-C aryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 substituents; -C(0)Rb; 6-14 membered heteroaryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 substituents; C7-Cl6 aralkyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 substituents; Rb can be C6-Cι0 aryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 substituents; or 5-10 membered heteroaryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 substituents. Substituents may be the same or different and may include halo, - alkyl, or C,-C4 alkoxy.
Representative compounds are provided in FIG. 1.
Combinations of substituents and variables envisioned by this invention are only those that result in the formation of stable compounds. The term "stable", as used herein, refers to compounds which possess stability sufficient to allow manufacture and which maintains the integrity of the compound for a sufficient period of time to be useful for the puφoses detailed herein (e.g, therapeutic or prophylactic administration to a subject). Compounds mat can oe userui m treating fungal infection can be identified through both in vitro (cell and non-cell based) and in vivo methods, for example, the method described below in Example 2
The compounds described herein can be obtained from commercial sources (e.g. Specs Biospecs, Chembridge, InterBioscreen, Maybridge, TimTec, Comgenex) or synthesized by conventional methods as shown below using commercially available starting materials and reagents. For example, compounds having formula (K) can be synthesized via reductive alkylation as shown in Scheme 1 below.
Scheme 1
Figure imgf000050_0001
The compounds described herein can be separated from a reaction mixture and further purified by a method such as column chromatography, high-pressure liquid chromatography, or recrystallization. As can be appreciated by the skilled artisan, further methods of synthesizing the compounds of the formulae herein will be evident to those of ordinary skill in the art. Additionally, the various synthetic steps may be performed in an alternate sequence or order to give the desired compounds. Synthetic chemistry transformations and protecting group methodologies (protection and deprotection) useful in synthesizing the compounds described herein are known in the art and include, for example, those such as described in R. Larock, Comprehensive Organic Transformations, VCH Publishers (1989); T.W. Greene and P.G.M. ' Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 2d. Ed, John Wiley and Sons (1991); L. Fieser and M. Fieser, Fieser andFieser's Reagents for Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons (1994); and L. Paquette, ed. Encyclopedia of Reagents for Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons (1995), and subsequent editions thereof.
The compounds of this invention may contain one or more asymmetric centers and thus occur as racemates and racemic mixtures, single enantiomers, individual diastereomers and diastereomeric mixtures. All such isomeric forms of these compounds are expressly included in the present invention. The compounds of this invention may also contain linkages (e.g, carbon-carbon bonds) wherein bond rotation is restricted about that particular linkage, e.g. restriction resulting from the presence of a ring or double bond. Accordingly, all cis/trans and E/Z isomers are expressly included in the present invention. The compounds of this invention may also be represented in multiple tautomeric forms, in such instances; the invention expressly includes all tautomeric forms of the compounds described herein, even though only a single tautomeric form may be represented (e.g, alkylation of a ring system may result in alkylation at multiple sites, the invention expressly includes all such reaction products). All such isomeric forms of such compounds are expressly included in the present invention. All crystal forms of the compounds described herein are expressly included in the present invention.
The compounds of this invention include the compounds themselves, as well as their salts and their prodrugs, if applicable. A salt, for example, can be formed between an anion and a positively charged substituent (e.g, amino) on a compound described herein. Suitable anions include chloride, bromide, iodide, sulfate, nitrate, phosphate, citrate, methanesulfonate, trifluoroacetate, and acetate. Likewise, a salt can also be formed between a cation and a negatively charged substituent (e.g, carboxylate) on a compound described herein. Suitable cations include sodium ion, potassium ion, magnesium ion, calcium ion, and an ammonium cation such as tetramethylammonium ion. Examples of prodrugs include esters and other pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives, which, upon administration to a subject, are capable of providing active compounds.
The compounds of this invention may be modified by appending appropriate functionalities to enhance selected biological properties. Such modifications are known in the art and include those which increase biological penetration into a given biological compartment (e.g, blood, lymphatic system, central nervous system), increase oral availability, increase solubility to allow administration by injection, alter metabolism and alter rate of excretion.
The invention will be further described in the following examples. It should be understood that these examples are for illustrative puφoses only and are not to be construed as limiting this invention in any manner.
EXAMPLE 1
Depicted in FIG. 1A are examples of several compounds having formula A, several compound having formula O, several compounds having formula L, several compounds having formula C, several compounds having formula AA, several compounds having formula AB, several compounds having formula R, and several compound having formula K. The various compounds are inhibitors of fungal invasion. The activity of the compounds in various assays of fungal invasion and mammalian cell toxicity was measured as described below in Example 2 and the results are presented in FIG. 1 A. Thus, results are reported for the following tests: C. albicans HWPl-lacZ Reporter logarithmic phase growth invasion assay (column 2), C. albicans HWPl-lacZ Reporter stationary phase growth invasion assay
(column 3), C. albicans MlCgrowth assay (column 4), C. albicans moφhology assay (no units) (column 5), and mammalian cell toxicity (column 6). FIG. IB depicts additional compounds within formula (AA). The structure of each compound is shown in the first column and the activity of the compound in the C. albicans HWPl-lacZ Reporter logarithmic phase growth invasion assay is shown in the second column. EXAMPLE 1-A
Representative Synthesis of Compounds Having Formula (K)
l-Methyl-4-(methylamino)piperidine (500 mg, 3.90mmol, 1.2 eq.) was dissolved in acetonitrile (5 mL). To the resulting solution was added glacial acetic acid (1.94 mL, 32.5 mmol, lOeq.) followed by 3-(3,4-dichloropheneoxy) benzaldehyde (868 mg, 3.25 mmol, 1.0 eq.) and sodium cyanoborohydride (612 mg, 9.75 mmol, 3.0 eq.). After initial dissolution of all reactants the reaction mixture was stined until a fine colorless precipitate started to form. Water (0.5mL) was added to redissolve the colorless solid. The reaction mixture was then stined at room temperature for 24h.
IN NaOH (20 mL) was added and the reaction mixture was stined at room temperature for 15 min, before being extracted with dichloromethane (3x40 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with brine (20 mL) and dried over MgS0 . Volatiles were removed in vacuo and the oily residue was purified by flash column chromatography (CH2C12: MeOH 20:1 to CH2C12: MeOH 10:1, 0.5% NF jCl). After concentration the product was obtained as a colorless oil (899 mg, 2.37 mmol, 73%). Η NMR (CDCl3/300MHz): 7.35 (d, IH, J= 9.0 Hz), 7.28 (t, IH, J= 7.7 Hz), 7.11 (brd, IH), 7.05 (d, IH, J = 3.2 Hz), 7.03-6.99 (m, IH), 6.89-6.84 (m, IH), 6.84 (dd, IH, J= 9.0, 3.2 Hz), 3.56 (s, 2H), 2.93 (brd, 2H, J= 11.7 Hz), 2.48-2.33 (m, IH), 2.28 (s, 3H), 2.20 (s, 3H), 2.01-1.92 ( , 2H), 1.81-1.60 (m, 4H). LRMS m/z 380 (M+H).
EXAMPLE 2
Described below are various assays for measuring anti-invasin activity and the effect of compounds on cell growth. These assays are useful for assessing the compounds described herein and related compounds.
HWP-lacZ Reporter Assay (logarithmic phase growth)
The expression of the HWP1 gene has been coπelated with invasion in C. albicans and thus can be used as a marker for invasion. Fusion of the HWP1 promoter with lacZ provides an easy assay to measure the potential anti-invasin effects of test compounds.
Briefly, stock cultures for use in this assay are prepared by streaking C. albicans (MC295: ura3 Δ : : imm434/ura3Δ : : imm434 arg4::hisG/arg4::hisG hisl : :hisG/HISl HWPl::HWPlp-lacZ(URA3)/HWPl gall::ARG4/GALl) cells on a YPD plate. The cells are grown at 30°C for 14-18 hr and an isolated colony is picked and inoculated into a 250 ml Erlenmeyer flask containing Non-Inducing Media (NT) (per liter: 1.5 g yeast nitrogen base w/o amino acids or ammonium sulfate, 5 g ammonium sulfate, 0.2mmol Inositol, 50 ml of 40% glucose, 120 ml of 0.5M succinate, pH adjusted to 4.5) that is sterilized by passing it through a 0.22 μm filter. The flask is placed on a rotary shaker at 30°C between 200-250 φm, for 14- 18 hr. The optical density at 600 nm (ODOOO) is determined using NI media as a blank. The overnight culture is diluted with 15% glycerol to a final OD600 of 0.1 and aliquotted into 1 ml sterile cryonic tubes that are capped and stored at -80°C.
To prepare assay cultures, approximately 350 μl of thawed Candida albicans (MC295) stock is inoculated into a flask containing 50 ml of NI medium. In addition, 1/1 (vol/vol) serial dilutions are made into two additional flasks, each containing 25 ml of NI medium. The flasks are placed on a rotary shaker at 30 °C between 200-250 φm, for 14-18 h. At the end of the growth period, the OD6oo for each culture is determined using NI medium as a blank. The flask containing cells at an OD6oo of 0.8-1.0 is transfeπed to a 50 ml Falcon tube and centrifuged 5 minutes at 2000 φm. The supernatant is discarded and the pellet is resuspended in an equal volume of Inducing Media. The washed cells are immediately used as a 10X stock for the HWPl-lacZ reporter assay. To prepare an assay culture, 10 μl of 10X cell stock is added to 80 μl of Inducing Media (per liter: 1.5 g yeast nitrogen base w/o amino acids or ammonium sulfate, 5 g ammonium sulfate, 0.2 mmol Inositol, 50 ml of 40% glucose, 50 ml of IM MOPS, pH adjusted to 7.5 with IN NaOH) and 10 μl of 10X test compound stock or, as a control, DMSO, in a Corning, tissue culture treated, flat-bottom, microtiter plate. The plate is incubated at 37°C for 3 hr. Expression of the HWPl-lacZ reporter is assessed by measuring β-galactosidase activity with a fluorogenic substrate. Briefly, MUG stock (54 mg/ml 4-methylumbelliferyl beta-D-galactoside in DMSO) is diluted to 0.4 mg/ml in Z buffer (per liter: 16.1 gNa2HP04 »7H20), 5.5 g NaH2P04 »H20, 0.75g KCl, 0.246 g MgSO4*H20, lOOmg of sodium deoxycholic acid, 200mg of CTAB, 1.62 ml beta-mercaptoethanol, pH 7.0) to create MUG/Z solution.
To initiate the reaction 100 μλ of MUG/Z solution is added to each test well (final MUG concentration of 0.2 mg/ml) and the plate is incubated at 22°C for 1 hr. The reaction is quenched with 60 μl of 1 M sodium bicarbonate and fluorescence is measured using a Spectromax Gemini Fluorometer (Excitation 360 nm, Emission 449 nm). Negative and positive controls are used in each experiment. DMSO treated cells define the maximal level of reporter induction ("no drug control") while cells treated with 15 μg/ml amphotericin B (AMB) mimic the effect of complete inhibition of reporter induction. Inhibition of reporter expression is calculated using the formula: % inhibition = (l-(F[449]test compoun - F[449]AMB controi)/(F[449]DMso control ~F(449)AMB control)* 100. The IC50 is determined for each compound of interest. HWP-lacZ Reporter Assay (stationary phase growth)
This assay is similar to the HWP-lacZ Reporter Assay (logarithmic phase growth) assays described above, except that the assay takes place when the cells are in the stationary phase.
Briefly, stock cultures for use in this assay are prepared by streaking C. albicans (MC-295: ura3Δ::imm434/ura3Δ::imrn434 hisl::hisG/hisl::hisG arg4: :MsG/arg4: :hisG hisl::hisG/+
HWPl/HWPlp-lacZ(URA3) gal::ARG4/GAL) cells for isolation on a YPD agar plate. The cells are grown at 30°C for 14-18 h, and an isolated colony is added to 5 mL of YPD broth and grown on a roller drum (60 φm) for 14-18 h at 30°C. Stocks are prepared by aliquotting 600 μL of culture into 1 mL of 25% glycerol. The stocks are stored at -80°C.
Cultures for assays are prepared by streaking frozen culture stock on a YPD agar plate and growing the cells for 30 °C for 14-18 h. A single colony is inoculated into 5 mL of YPD in a test tube and grown on a roller drum (60 φm) for 2 days at 30°C to late stationary phase (ODβoo ~ 30). For the assay, the primary cell suspension stock is diluted to an OD600 of 1.0 (~2xl07 cells/mL) to make a 10X stock.
To prepare an assay culture, 10 μL of 10X cell stock is added to 80 μL of Inducing Media (see below) and 10 μL of 10X test compound stock or, as a control, DMSO in a Corning, tissue-culture treated, flat-bottom, microtiter plate. The plate is incubated at 37°C for 3 h. To measure invasion activity, β-galactosidase activity is determined using MUG. Briefly, MUG stock is diluted to 0.4 mg/mL in Z buffer to create MUG/Z solution (see below). To initiate the reaction 100 μL of MUG/Z solution is added to each test well (final MUG concentration of 0.2 mg/mL) and the plate is incubated at 22 °C for 1 h. The reaction is quenched with 60 μL of 1 M sodium bicarbonate and fluorescence is measured using a Spectromax Gemini Fluorometer (Excitation 360 nm, Emission 449 nm). Inhibition of invasion is calculated using the formula: %inhibition = (l-((unknown)ave-(positive drug control)ave)/((no drug confroi)ave-(positive drug control)ave))*100.
Growth Inhibition Assay (MIC nwti, assay)
The minimum growth inhibitory concentration for an antifungal drug MlCgrowth is assessed using a standardized protocol that is described by NCCLS (method M27-A). Briefly, MC305 (ATCC 90028) is streaked from a glycerol stock onto a YPD plate. Cells are incubated for 24 hr at 35°C. Five isolated colonies are picked and resuspended in 5 ml of 0.85 % saline. A hemocytometer is used to verify that this is a yeast stock suspension of 1-5 x 106 cells/ml. Cells are then diluted in RPMI 1640 to obtain 1-5 x 105 (20X) cells/ml stock (this is the adjusted lOx inoculum). The RPMI 1640 media (with glutamine, without bicarbonate and with a pH indicator) media is made by dissolving 10.4 g powdered medium in 900-ml dH20 and 34.53 g MOPS are added (to a final concentration of 0.165 M). While stirring, the pH is adjusted to 7.0 at 25" using 1 N NaOH and 45 ml of 40% dextrose is added to give a 2 % final concentration. Finally, the volume is adjusted to 1 liter and the media is filter sterilized and stored at 4°C.
Test compounds are diluted from 100 mM to 6.4 mg/ml (100X) stock in DMSO in triplicate. All subsequent series of 2x dilutions are performed in DMSO. Aliquots can be kept 6 months at -80 °C. The test compound should be in DMSO at room temperature for several hours before the test. The final DMSO is concentration is 1% for the test compound solution and the compound control.
A series of 2-fold test compound dilutions are tested (e.g, 64, 32, 16, 8, 4 , 2, 1, 0.5, 0.25, and 0.125 μg/ml) along with a "no test compound control" and a "no cells" control. The testing is performed in a 96 well plate. Each well contains: 2 μl of lOOx-test compound stock; 163 μl of RPMI 1640, 25 μl of 0 Alamar Blue (Biosource; Catalog Number DALl 100); 10 μl of the adjusted inoculum (yields about 500- 2500 cells/well) (except for the "no cells" control). The plate is incubated in a moist chamber for 24 hr at 35°C. MlCgrowth is defined as the lowest concentration of an antifungal that substantially inhibits growth of the organism as detected visually. Various known anti-fungal drugs can be used as additional controls as indicated below.
5
Figure imgf000055_0001
Moφhology Assay
Invasion can be associated with dramatic moφhological transitions. In the case of C. albicans, this is the transition from yeast form cells in non-inducing media to filamentous forms in inducing media.
>0 This analysis can be performed using a variety of C. albicans strains but MC303 (ura3 Δ::imm434/ura3Δ::imm434 arg4::hisG/arg4::hisG ade2:: URA3:pTEFl-lacZ/ADE2 hisl::hisG/HISl gall::ARG4/GALl) or its closely related strains are prefeπed as they perform very reproducibly in this assay. MC3U3 C. albicans is streaked from a frozen cell stock onto a YPD plate and incubated at 30°C for 14-18 h. A single colony is inoculated into 5 ml of YPD in a test tube and grown on a roller drum (60 φm) for 2 days at 30°C to stationary phase (OD6oo ~ 30). Cells are pelleted and washed with water and can be stored at 4°C for up to 2 weeks before use. For the assay, this stock is diluted to 2.5x105 cells/ml to make a 10X stock. Next, 10 μl of this cell stock is added to 80 μl of Inducing Media and 10 μl of 10X compound stock or DMSO in a Corning, tissue culture treated, flat-bottom, microtiter plate. The plate is incubated at 37°C for 24 hr without agitation. Each well is observed microscopically and cells are scored on a scale of 1-5 with regard to cellular moφhology. A score of 5 indicates that C. albicans cells have many long hyphae and is the wild type (WT) phenotype (no drug control). A score of 1 indicates cells are non-hyphal with only "yeast-like" cells and budding cells. Scores of 2, 3, and 4 indicate shorter length or reduced quantity of hyphae when compared with WT (a score of 2 being very near non-hyphal and a score of 4 being close to WT. Compounds that result in a phenotypic score of 1 or 2 at a given concentration are considered to have significant anti-invasin properties. The MIC;nVasion is defined in this assay as the minimum concentration of test compound that results in a phenotypic score of 1 or 2.
Mammalian cell toxicity assay
To investigate the toxicity of for mammalian cells, human hepatoma cell line HepG2 are exposed to a compound and the (LD50) was determined. Briefly, HepG2 human hepatoma cells (American Type Culture Collection, Bethesda MD) are plated at 1 x 105 cells/well in tissue culture treated 96 well plates and incubated at 5% C02, 37 °C for 18 h prior to initiation of the assay. The compound stocks at 100 mM in DMSO are added to DM (defined media, media without serum with added insulin, selenium and fransferrin) at an initial concentration of 1000 μM and serially diluted 1 to 3 in DM in a 96 well plate. For 20 μL of a test solution, 3.5 μL sample is added to 346.5 μL media for an initial concentration of 1000 μM. These dilutions are added to the cells at final sample concentrations between 0.5 and 1000 μM (< 1% DMSO). Controls included: media only (negative confrol) and 0.1% Triton-X (positive control). Control drugs (tamoxifen and 2-thiouracil) are also used to verify each assay. The samples are incubated at 37 °C in humidified 5% C02 atmosphere for 4 h. Next, sterile Alamar Blue solution (final 0.5% w/v) is added to each well and the cells were incubated at 37 °C in 5% C02 for at least 3 h. The plate is read directly on the Tecan Spectrafluor Plus reader in the fluorescent mode at excitation 530 nm and emission 595 nm. The blank is subtracted from the total fluorescence to give the net fluorescence for that well.
This total is compared to the confrol in the absence of the compound. An LD50 (concenfration at 50% of lethal dose) is calculated as the concentration that leads to a response of 50% compared to the control cells. Thus, cytotoxicity is measured as percent of inhibition of cell viability as determined by the Alamar Blue assay. The expected LD50 ranges of the two control drugs are as follows: tamoxifen, LD50=30-80 μM and 2-thiouracil, LD50 >1000 μM.
Plastic Adherence Assay
Invasion is often associated with changes in cell adherence properties. A straightforward method to assess this behavior in vitro is to measure the ability of C. albicans to adhere to plastic surfaces in the presence and absence of a potential anti-invasin compound. Stocks of C. albicans (MC295) are prepared by growing strains 48 hrs in YPD at 30°C with shaking. Cells are pelleted by centrifugation and diluted in sterile water to an OD60o of 1.0. This stock is stored at 4°C until ready for use (up to one week). To perform the assay, the following reagents are mixed in individual wells of a 96 well plate: 85μl of RPMI media, 5 μl of test compound (diluted in 25mM HEPES buffer, pH 7.5), and 10 μl of stock C. albicans cells. Plates are incubated at 37°C overnight to allow time for adherence. Non-adherent cells are removed by washing with 150 μl of water using an M384 Atlas platewasher; program: Dispense Height: 150; Dispense Rate: 1; Dispense Orientation X/Y/Z: 0/0/0, Aspiration Height: 50, Aspiration Rate: 2; Aspiration Orientation X/Y/Z: 0/0/0; Method: 96 wells, lx). Cell adherence is quantified by measuring OD600 of each well. Percent inhibition of adherence is calculated as: [1-(OD600 of well containing the test compound/ODβoo of DMSO treated control well)]*100. Percent inhibition values of greater than 80% were scored as significantly inhibited. Due to the nature of this assay, compounds that inhibit growth at a given concentration iaiseiy score positive in the adherence assay. These false positives can be readily identified by a variety of secondary assays including the MICgr0Wth analysis described below. The MICinvasion is defined in this assay as the minimum concentration of test compound that results greater than 80% inhibition of adherence as defined above.
Invasion into Agar Substrate Assay
Invasion into agar substrates can be used as an in vitro suπogate to mimic the process of fungal invasion in vivo. This assay can be performed in high throughput with many C. albicans isolates or to test the response of specific strains to many different potential anti-invasin compounds. C. albicans strain MC12 (SC5314) is a well-studied clinical isolate that performs very robustly in this assay. MC12 is inoculated into each well of a 96-well plate containing 150 μl YPD/well and grown overnight (12-18 hrs) on an orbital shaker at 30°C. Cells are serially diluted (1:10) into fresh YPD and plated in 5 μl droplets (in a grid formation) on YPD plates with and without test compound. Plates are incubated at 37°C for 4 days and scored for the invasion response. To distinguish cells that have invaded into the agar from those growing on the surface, plates are washed under a stream of tap water and non-invaded cells are removed by rubbing gentle, manual rubbing. In the absence of an anti-invasin compound, masses of filaments are readily observable below both isolated colonies and dense patches of cells. Anti-invasin compounds block the ability of C. albicans to invade the agar and therefore only isolated cells, clumps of cells, or occasional filaments are observed on plates containing anti-invasin compounds. This assay can be influenced by position on the plate and, consequently, the most reproducible results are obtained when comparing colonies in similar relative plate positions and in regions of similar colony density. This assay can be used to score both MlCgrowth and MICinvasiθn on solid media. MlCgrowth is defined as the minimum concentration of a test compound necessary to dramatically inhibit growth on the plate. MICinvasion is defined as the minimum concentration of test compound necessary to significantly reduce the number of invaded cells.
Migration Across Caco-2 Monolayer Assay
A key aspect of fungal pathogenesis is the invasion of fungal cells across the epithelial and endothelial cell barriers. An in vitro system to mimic this has been described by Weide and Ernst
(Mycoses (1999), 42, (SUPPL. 2), 61-67). Caco-2 monolayers are prepared by seeding cells in 6-well culture dishes containing removable porous inserts (3μm pore diameter). Caco-2 cells are grown in media consisting of Dulbeccos Modified Eagle Media (DMEM) (lacking glutamine and sodium pyruvate) supplemented with 4.5 g/1 glucose, 20% fetal calf serum (heat inactivated), 292 mg/ml glutamine, 1% non-essential amino acids, and 1 mM sodium pyruvate. 2 ml of growth media is added to both the upper and lower compartments and replaced every 2-3 days. Plates of cells are maintained at 37°C, 5% C02,
95% humidity for 10-25 days to generate confluent monolayers of differentiated Caco-2 cells. Immediately prior to addition of C. albicans, Caco-2 media is removed, cells are washed once with PBS, ana rresn L-aco- culture media (without fetal calf serum) is added. C. albicans cells of the strain MCI 2 are grown overnight in YPD, pelleted, and washed once in sterile water. C. albicans are added to each test well +/- compound at a final concentration of 2 x 106 C. albicans cells/ml. C. albicans and Caco-2 cells are co-cultured for up to 24 hrs (37°C, 5% C02, 95% humidity). Migration across the Caco-2 monolayer is assessed by detection of C. albicans in the lower compartment (collected by washing and centrifugation to concentrate). Cells that are able to invade can be readily detected in the lower compartment within 12-24 hrs while C. albicans that are inhibited by an effective dose of anti-invasin are trapped within the upper compartment only. The MIC;nvasjon in this assay is defined in this assay as the minimum concentration of test compound that completely inhibits migration of C. albicans across the Caco-2 monolayer after incubation for 24 hrs.
Effectiveness of Inhibitors of Fungal Invasion In Vivo
A mouse model of fungal invasion is used to examine the in vivo efficacy of a test compound in reducing invasion by C. albicans. This can be done in several ways. Two specific variations are described below.
Method 1 (IP administration): Thirty min prior to infection (t = -30 min), 1 mg of a test compound in buffer (10 treatment mice) or buffer only (10 control mice) is administered IP. At t=0 all mice are inoculated with 2xl06 C. albicans. At t=6 h and t=14 h the ff treatment with a test compound or buffer is repeated. In addition, at t=2, t=4h, t=10 h, and t=18 h 1 mg of a test compound or buffer only is administered orally. The mice are sacrificed at about t^l9h and the kidneys of the mice are examined for histologic signs of fungal invasion by counting the number of lesions.
Method 2 (oral administration): Alternatively, one day prior to infection (t = -24 h) mice are switched to a powdered diet supplemented a test compound (treatment mice) or no supplement (control mice). This diet is continued until the mice are sacrificed at t=48 h. The kidneys of the mice are then examined for histologic signs of fungal invasion. In the scoring system used, a score of 5 indicates the presence of many, large fungus-dominated lesions, a score of 3 indicates the presence of many inflammatory lesion and fungus-dominated lesion of mixed size, and a score of 1 indicates few, mainly inflammatory lesions.
COMPOUNDS OF FORMULAS: (D. (TI). (HI). (TV), and (V)
The compounds of formulas (I), (TI), (HI), (TV), and (V) are thiazolesulfonamide and isothiazolesulfonamide-based inhibitors of fungal invasion. They can be represented by the general formulas A' and B' respectively. Compounds of formula A' contain a substituted or unsubstituted phenyl or thienyl sulfonamide group at C-2 of the thiazole ring, while compounds of formula B' contain a substituted or unsubstituted pnenyl or thienyl sulfonamide group at the C-3 position of the isothiazole ring.
Representative compounds are provided in FIG. 2.
Figure imgf000060_0001
Figure imgf000060_0002
(phenyl)
Combinations of substituents and variables envisioned by this invention are only those that result in the formation of stable compounds. The term "stable", as used herein, refers to compounds which possess stability sufficient to allow manufacture and which maintains the integrity of the compound for a sufficient period of time to be useful for the puφoses detailed herein (e.g, therapeutic or prophylactic administration to a subject).
Fungus inhibiting compounds can be identified through both in vitro (cell and non-cell based) and in vivo methods. A description of these methods is described in the Examples.
Synthesis of Thiazole Compounds
Compounds of formula A' can be prepared as shown in Scheme 2 by the reaction between a 2- aminothiazole 3 with either a phenylsulfonyl chloride 1 or a thienylsulfonyl chloride 2. The reaction is typically run in the presence of a base (e.g, aqueous sodium hydroxide or a tertiary amine) to scavenge the HCl by-product. The res lting sulfonamides 4 and 5 can be obtained in moderate to good yields. The 2-aminothiazoles are commercially available (e.g, Aldrich Chemical, Milwaukee, WT) or may be synthesized by the method of Kulkarni et al.(See Kulkarni, K. D.; Shirsat, M. V, "Chemistry of the thiazoles-synthesis of 2-amino-5-alkylthiazoles," J Sci. and Ind. Research (India) 1959, 18B, 411-13). In general, all or some of the substituents (R1, R2, R4, etc.) desired in the final sulfonamide product may also be present in the reactants 1, 2, and or 3 when the amine-sulfonyl chloride coupling reaction takes place.
Scheme 2
Figure imgf000061_0001
I0
The sulfonyl chlorides 1 and 2 in turn can be prepared by methods that are within skill of the art. For example, compound 1 can be obtained by the direct chlorosulfonation of an aromatic compound e.g, 6a (X = H), with excess chlorosulfonic acid (Scheme 3). This method can also be used for the preparation of 2 when thiophene 7a is employed as the starting material (X = H) (Scheme 3). Alternatively, sulfonyl chlorides 1 and 2 can be prepared from the conesponding bromo compounds 6a and 6b (X = Br). For example, metallation of bromides 6a and 6b with n-butyllithium, followed by the sequential addition of sulfur dioxide and sulfuryl chloride, can also afford aromatic and heteroaromatic sulfonylchlorides 1 and 2. Scheme 3
ISO3H
Figure imgf000062_0001
Figure imgf000062_0002
6a X = H 6b X = Br
Figure imgf000062_0003
In compound 4, when Rδ is a leaving group (e.g, halo, triflate, mesylate, nosylate, etc.), it is possible to replace the leaving group with another substituent.
For example, exposure of 4a or 4b (R6 = I or Br respectively) to an aryl boronic acid e.g, 8a, an aryl stannane e.g, 8b, or an aryl zinc halide e.g, 8c, in the presence of a palladium catalyst [e.g, Pd(PPh3)4 or PdCl2(dppf)] can result in the production of biphenyl derivatives e.g, 9 (Scheme 4). The reaction may be carried out in the presence of a base (e.g, K2C03 or triethylamine). The transformation may also be conducted with heteroaromatic coupling partners (e.g, thiophene, pyridine, furan, etc.) bearing boronic acid, trialkyltin, and halozinc substituents. Metal catalyzed coupling reactions are described in: Herrmann, Wolfgang A. The Suzuki cross-coupling. Applied Homogeneous Catalysis with Organometallic Compounds (2nd Edition) (2002), 1 591-598 (boronic acid cross couplings); Hassan, Jwanro; Sevignon, Marc; Gozzi, Christel; Schulz, Emmanuelle; Lemaire, Marc. Aryl-Aryl Bond
Formation One Century after the Discovery of the Ullmann Reaction. Chemical Reviews (2002), 102(5), 1359-1469 (trialkyltin cross couplings); and Negishi, Ei-Ichi; Liu, Fang. Palladium- or nickel-catalyzed cross-coupling with organometals containing zinc, magnesium, aluminum, and zirconium. Metal- Catalyzed Cross-Coupling Reactions (1998), 1-47 (organozinc cross couplings). Scheme 4
Figure imgf000063_0001
Figure imgf000063_0002
As shown in Scheme 5, palladium-catalyzed coupling of 4a or 4b with (i) an amine 10, (ii) an alkyne 11, (iii) an i?-vinyl borinate ester 12, or (iv) a trialkyl borane 13 can afford compounds 4c, 4d, 4e, and 4f, containing an amino group, an alkynyl group, an alkenyl group, and an alkyl group respectively at R6. The coupling reactions shown in Scheme 5 are described in M. H. Ali, S.L. Buchwald, J. Org. Chem. 2001, 66, 2560-2565, and J. P. Wolfe, H. Tomori, J. P. Sadighi, J. Yin, S. L. Buchwald/. Org. Chem. 2000, 65, 1158-1174 (amines); W. G. B. van Henegouwen, R. M. Fieseler, F. P. J. T. Rutjes, H. Hiemsfra, Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl. 1999, 38, 2214, and G. Esteban, M. A. Lopez-Sanchez. M. E. Martinez, J. Plumet Tetrahedron 1998, 54, 197 (vinyl borinates); N. Miyaura et al. Tetrahedron Lett. 1986, 27, 6369, and S. R. Chemler, D. Trauner, S. J. Danishefsky.4/zgew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl. 2001, 40, 4544 (trialkylboranes); K. Songashira, Y. Tohda, N. Hagihira Tetrahedron Lett. 1975, 4467-70, and S. Thorand, N. Krause J. Org. Chem. 1998, 8551 (alkynes). The alkynylated compounds e.g, 4d can subsequently be hydrogenated with a reduced activity catalyst, e.g, Lindlar's catalyst, to afford the conesponding Z-olefins. This two-step Z-olefm synthesis is complementary to the vinyl borinate coupling above, which yields ii-olefins. Scheme 5
HNR31R32
Figure imgf000064_0001
Figure imgf000064_0002
(R8l)3B 13
4f R6 = R 81
Compounds containing alkoxy or thioalkoxy groups at R6 e.g. 4h can be formed by the reaction between 4g (R6 = F) and the conesponding alkoxides, phenoxides, mercaptides or thiophenoxides. The latter species can be generated in situ from the conesponding alcohols, phenols, thiols or thiophenol (e.g, R14XH) with a base e.g, sodium hydride, potassium hydride, potassium hydroxide, or a tertiary amine (Scheme 6).
Figure imgf000065_0001
4g R6 = F
Scheme 6
Compounds containing an unsubstituted amino group (e.g, 4c in which R31 and R32 are = H) at R6 can be condensed with an aldehyde or ketone to form an aldimine or ketimine respectively. When the condensation is caπied out in the presence of a reducing agent, e.g, triacetoxyborohydride, the C=N can be reduced in situ to form a monosubstituted amine. Alternatively, the imine may be isolated and may be optionally reduced with other reducing agents, e.g, chiral reducing agents to form monosubstituted amines.
Synthesis of Isothiazoles
The compounds of formula B' e.g, 15 and 16 can also be prepared as described above by the reaction between the 3-aminothiazole 14 with either phenylsulfonyl chloride 1 or thienylsulfonyl chloride 2 (Scheme 7). The 3-aminoisothiazoles may be obtained in a stepwise manner (Scheme 8) from the corresponding 3-aminoisoxazole 17 via palladium catalyzed hydrogenation, followed by in situ treatment of the acyclic reduction product with phosphorus pentasulfide and chloranil (see e.g, D. N. McGregor, U.. Corbin, J. E. Swigor, L. C. Cheney, Tetrahedron 1969, 25, 389). In general, all or some of the substituents (R1, R2, R4, etc.) desired in the final sulfonamide product may also be present in the reactants 1, 2, and or 3 when the amine-sulfonyl chloride coupling reaction takes place.
Scheme 7
Figure imgf000066_0001
16
Scheme 8
Figure imgf000066_0002
17 14
Alternatively, isothiazole compounds, e.g, 15 can be obtained from the conesponding isoxzaole compound 18 using essentially the same reaction conditions as those employed in Scheme 8 to covert compound 17 to compound 14 (see Scheme 9). Scheme 9
Figure imgf000067_0001
Isothiazole compounds 19, 15c, 15d, 15e, 15f, and 15h (shown below) are analogous to thiazole compounds 9, 4c, 4d, 4e, 4f, and 4h. The compounds can be prepared by the methods described above from the Rδ-halo substituted compounds 15a, 15b, and 15g and the reaction partners described in Schemes 4-8.
Figure imgf000067_0002
15a R6 = l 15d R6 = R 15b R6 = Br '41
Figure imgf000067_0003
Figure imgf000067_0004
19 The synthesized thiazole and isothiazole compounds can be separated from a reaction mixture and further purified by a method such as column chromatography, high pressure liquid chromatography, or recrystallization. As can be appreciated by the skilled artisan, further methods of synthesizing the compounds of the formulae herein will be evident. Additionally, the various synthetic steps may be performed in an alternate sequence or order to give the desired compounds. Synthetic chemistry transformations and protecting group methodologies (protection and deprotection) useful in synthesizing the compounds described herein are known in the art and include, for example, those such as described in R. Larock, Comprehensive Organic Transformations, VCH Publishers (1989); T.W. Greene and P.G.M. Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 2d. Ed, John Wiley and Sons (1991); L. Fieser and M. Fieser, Fieser andFieser's Reagents for Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons (1994); and L. Paquette, ed. Encyclopedia of Reagents for Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons (1995), and subsequent editions thereof.
The thiazole and isothiazole compounds of this invention may contain one or more asymmetric centers and thus occur as racemates and racemic mixtures, single enantiomers, individual diastereomers and diastereomeric mixtures. All such isomeric forms of these compounds are expressly included in the present invention. The compounds of this invention may also be represented in multiple tautomeric forms, in such instances, the invention expressly mcludes all tautomeric forms of the compounds described herein (e.g, alkylation of a ring system may result in alkylation at multiple sites, the invention expressly includes all such reaction products). All such isomeric forms of such compounds are expressly included in the present invention. All crystal foπns of the compounds described herein are expressly included in the present invention.
The thiazole and isothiazole compounds of this invention include the compounds themselves, as well as their salts and their prodrugs, if applicable. A salt, for example, can be formed between an anion and a positively charged substituent (e.g, amino) on a thiazole or isothiazole compound. Suitable anions include chloride, bromide, iodide, sulfate, nitrate, phosphate, citrate, methanesulfonate, trifluoroacetate, and acetate. Likewise, a salt can also be formed between a cation and a negatively charged substituent (e.g, carboxylate) on a thiazole or isothiazole compound. Suitable cations include sodium ion, potassium ion, magnesium ion, calcium ion, and an ammonium cation such as tetramethylammonium ion. Examples of prodrugs include esters and other pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives, which, upon administration to a subject, are capable of providing active thiazole or isothiazole compounds.
The compounds of this invention may be modified by appending appropriate functionalities to enhance selective biological properties. Such modifications are known in the art and include those which increase biological penetration into a given biological compartment (e.g, blood, lymphatic system, central nervous system), increase oral availability, increase solubility to allow administration by injection, alter metabolism and alter rate of excretion. EXAMPLE 3
4-(3-Methylbutyl)-N-(5-methylisothiazol-3-yl)benzenesulfonamide
Figure imgf000069_0001
Step 1. Preparation of 4-bromo-N-(5-methylisothiazol-3-yl)benzenesulfonamide. A 50 mL round bottom flask was charged with 3-amino-5-methylisothiazole (125 mg, 1.1 mmol), pyridine (5 mL, 62 mmol) and 4-bromobenzenesulfonyl chloride (280 mg, 1.1 mmol). The reaction mixture was stined at 23 °C for 20 h, and then diluted with ethyl acetate (50 mL), partitioned with water (20 mL), and adjusted to pH 1 with 3N HCl. The aqueous layer was extracted with 3 x 30 mL of ethyl acetate. The organic fractions were combined and washed with brine (10 mL), dried over Na2S04, filtered and concentrated. The residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (5% ethyl acetate/hexanes to 60% ethyl acetate/hexanes) to give 4-bromo-N-(5-methylisothiazol-3-yl)benzenesulfonamide as a white crystalline solid, 230 mg, 63%, mp 184.3 °C. Η NMR (CDCl3/300 MHz) 9.75 (s, IH, NH), 7.67 (d, 2H, J= 8.4 Hz, ArH), 7.58 (d, 2H, J= 8.5 Hz, ArH), 7.00 (s, IH, CH), 2.53 (s, 3H, CH3).
Step 2. Preparation of 4-r3-methylbutyl)-N-(5-methylisothiazol-3-yl)benzenesulfonamide. 4- Bromo-N-(5-methylisothiazol-3-yl)benzenesulfonamide (500 mg, 0.1.50 mmol) and tetrakis(triphenylphosphine) palladium (93 mg, 0.08 mmol) were dissolved in 6.5 mL of dry DMF. 3- Methylbutylzinc bromide (0.5M in THF, 6.50 mL, 3.25 mmol) was added via syringe at room temperature. The brownish-green solution was stined for 2h at 85 °C until analysis by LC-MS indicated complete consumption of the starting material. The reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature, quenched with 20 mL of sat. NH4C1 and brought to pH = 2-4 with IN HCl. The mixture was extracted with dichloromethane (3 x 50 mL) the combined organic layers were washed with of brine, dried over Na S0 and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography ιucΛttnc&/cuιyι αυcωι. ^. L lυnυwcu υy icuiγ&iallization from hexanes/diethyl ether 3: 1 gave pure product (276 mg, 57%) as a white solid mp 160 °C, dec. Η NMR (CDCl3/300 MHz) 8.09 (s, IH), 7.79 (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 2H), 7.26 (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 2H), 6.78 (s, m or d, IH, J= 1.4 Hz), 2.64 (t, J= 7.9 Hz, 2H), 2.24 (d, J = 1.2 Hz, 3H), 1.62-1.44 (m, 3H), 0.93 (d, J= 6.3 Hz, 6H).
EXAMPLE 4
3.4'-Difluoro-N-f 5-methyl- 1 ,3-thiazol-2-vD-l .1 '-biphenyl-4-sulfonamide
Figure imgf000070_0001
Preparation of 3 ,4'-difluoro-N-(5 -methyl- 1.3 -thiazol-2-yl)-l .1 '-biphenyl-4-sulfonamide. To a round bottom flask under nitrogen atmosphere was added 4-bromo-2-fluoro-N-(5-methyl-l,3-thiazol-2- yl)benzenesulfonamide (260 mg, 0.74 mmol), 4-fluorobenzeneboronic acid (145 mg, 1.04 mmol) and tetrakistriphenylphoshine palladium (43 mg, 0.037 mmol). Dry toluene (6 mL) was added followed by dry ethanol (1 mL), dry isopropyl alcohol (2 mL) and 2N potassium carbonate (0.9 mL, 1.8 mmol). The reaction was heated to 80 °C and stined for 16 h. The reaction was cooled, diluted with ethyl acetate (60 mL) quenched with IN HCl (20 mL). The organic layer was separated and washed with water (20 mL), brine (20 mL), dried over sodium sulfate and concentrated to afford the crude residue. Flash chromatography ethyl acetate/hexane (3/1 as gradient afforded the product 38 mg. 0.103 mmol, 15%, as a white solid, mp 216 °C. ]H MR (CDCl3/300 MHz) 8.05(1H, m), 7.54 (2H, m), 7.40 (IH, m), 7.27 (IH, m), 7.15 (2H, m), 6.91 (IH, s), 2.25 (3H, s). M-H+ = 365. EXAMPLE 5
N-(5 -Methylisothiazol-3 -yl)-4-propoxybenzenesulfonamide
Figure imgf000071_0001
Step 1. Preparation of 4-fluoro-N-(5 -methylisothiazol-3 -vDbenzenesulfonamide. Palladium. 10 wt. % (dry basis) on activated carbon (2.6 g, 1.2 mmol, 0.03 equiv) was added to a solution of 4-fluoro-N- (5-methylisoxazol-3-yl)benzenesulfonamide (9.0 g, 35 mmol) in 200 mL of ethyl acetate. The reaction mixture was flushed with hydrogen and stined under 1 ATM of hydrogen at 23 °C for 20 h. The palladium on carbon was removed by flushing the crude reaction mixture through a plug of silica gel with ethyl acetate. The filtrate was then concentrated to afford a clear oil. The clear oil was dissolved in toluene, and then P4Sι0 (23.4 g, 52.6 mmol, 1.5 equiv) was added followed by p-chloranil (8.6 g, 35.0 mmol). The reaction mixture was heated to 115 °C with vigorous stirring for 25 min. After cooling to 23 °C, the mixture was filtered and rinsed with water (50 mL) and dichloromethane (300 mL). All of the organic and aqueous layers were combined, diluted with water (150 mL), and adjusted to pH 1 with a solution of IN HCl. The aqueous layer was then separated and washed with 3 x 150 mL of dichloromethane. The organic layers were combined, dried over Na2S0 , filtered and concentrated to afford a dark brown solid. This solid was purified by silica gel chromatography (15% ethyl acetate/hexanes to 40% ethyl acetate/hexanes) to give crude 4-fluoro-N-(5 -methylisothiazol-3 - yι)benzenesulfonamide, which was recrystallized in ethyl acetate/hexanes to furnish pure product as an off-white crystalline solid (1.93 g, 20% yield, mp 154.3 °C. Η NMR (CDCl3/300 MHz) 9.75 (s, IH, NH), 7.86-7.79 (m, 2H, ArH), 7.15-7.07 (m, 2H, ArH), 7.01 (d, IH, J= 0.9 Hz, CH), 2.53 (d, 3H, J= 0.9 Hz, CH3).
Step 2. Preparation of Preparation of N-(5-methylisothiazol-3-yl)-4- propoxybenzenesulfonamide. Sodium hydride (95%, 35.3 mg, 1.4 mmol) was covered with dry dimethyl sulfoxide (0.5 mL) at room temperature. The mixture was rapidly stined and heated to 60- 70 °C for 1 h to generate the dimsyl anion. The pale gray-green solution was cooled to room temperature, neat 1- propanol (0.12 mL, 1.6 mmol) was added by syringe and stirring was continued 20 min at room temperature. 4-Fluoro-N-(5 -methylisothiazol-3 -yl)benzenesulfonamide (100 mg, 0.36 mmol) was added to the stined solution and the solution heated at 120 °C for 1 h or until TLC (Si02, 2:1 hexane/ethyl acetate) or LCMS indicated complete consumption of the starting material fluorobenzenesulfonamide. The reaction mixture was cooled to room temperature, poured into water (3 mL), and rapidly stined as the pH was reduced to 5 by addition of 1 N HCl. This mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic phase was then washed with water, brine, dried over sodium sulfate, decolorized with charcoal, filtered and the solvent was removed by rotary evaporation to give the crude product as a white solid. Column chromatography (hexane/ethyl acetate) gave pure product (70 mg, 61 %) as a white solid, mp 163-165 °C. H NMR: (CDC13/ 300 MHz) 8.75 (br s, IH), 7.75 (d, 2H), 7.00 (s, IH), 6.90 (d, 2H), 3.95, (t, 2H), 2.50 (s, 3H), 1.80 (m, 2H), 1.10 (t, 3H).
EXAMPLE 6
Generation and Testing of Additional Compounds of Formulas (I)-(V)
Based on compounds that received a score of less than 5 in the morphology assay described above in Example 2, a number of structurally related compounds having Formulas (I) - (V) were prepared and tested for the ability to inhibit fungal invasion using the methods described in Example 2. These compounds are depicted in the table of FIG. 2. In this Table the structure of the tested compound in depicted in the first column. Results are reported for the following tests: C. albicans logarithmic phase growth invasion assay (column 2), C. albicans stationary phase growth invasion assay (column 3), C. albicans minimum inhibitory concentration (column 4), C. albicans overnight growth inhibition (%)
(column 5), C albicans phenotype rating (no units) (column 6), and mammalian cell toxicity (column 7). The mouse model of fungal invasion in vivo, described above in Example 2, can also be used to further characterize the compounds in FIG. 2 as well as related compounds and other compounds described herein.
COMPOUNDS OF FORMULA VI
Certain compounds that can be used in practicing the invention have the general formula VI, in which R1, R1', R2, R2', R3, R3', R4, R4', R5, R5', R6, and R6' are attached to a 6-membered, carbocyclic core as shown below.
Figure imgf000073_0001
(VI)
R includes a carboxylic acid group, which may be connected either directly to the core or indirectly through a (CH2)n tether. Preferably, n is 0 or 1. R4 can be any alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, cycloalkenyl, heterocycloalkenyl, aryl, or heteroaryl group. Each of these possible R4 groups can be unsubstituted, or substituted with one or more substituents. Prefeπed R4 groups include substituted or unsubstituted straight or branched Cι-Cι2 alkyl (e.g, Ci-Cio, Cι-C8, C C6, Cι-C4); substituted or unsubstituted straight or branched Cι-Cι2 alkyl (e.g, Ci- o, -Cg, -C6, C C4) containing one or more heteroatoms (e.g, nitrogen, sulfur, or oxygen) inserted into one or more positions in the straight or branched alkyl chain; substituted or unsubstituted straight or branched C2-C]2 alkenyl (e.g, Q Cio, C2-C3, C2-C6, C2-C ); substituted or unsubstituted straight or branched C2-Cι2 alkynyl (e.g, C2-C10, C2-C8, C2-C6, C2-C4); Cj-Cg (e.g, C3-C7, C3-C6, C3-C5) cycloalkyl; and C6-Cι0 aryl. Substituents for R4 can include C3-C8 cycloalkyl, halo, hydroxy, mercapto, C Cι0 alkoxy, -Cio thioalkoxy, amino, Ci-Cio alkylamino, Cj-Cio dialkylamino, Cι-C10 haloalkyl, acyl and oxo. In certain embodiments, R4 can have any one of formulas A", B", C", D", or E". X may be N, O, or S, m may be 0-4 and n may be 1-4.
The core may be a saturated moiety, i.e., it does not contain any double bonds. The remaining positions
Figure imgf000074_0001
A" B" C"
Figure imgf000074_0002
E''
D" of a saturated core, R1', R2, R2', R3, R3', R4', R5, R5', R5, and R6', may be filled by any combination of hydrogen and -C6 alkyl. In certain embodiments, one of Rr, R2', R3', R4', R5 , or R6' and another of R1', R2', R3', R4', R5', or R6' together form a bridging C1-C3 alkylene group, e.g, -CH2CH2-, between two of the ring carbons of the core. Alternatively, the core may be unsaturated and contain 1-3 double bonds in the carbocyclic ring. Prefened core structures include formulas F", G", and H"
Figure imgf000074_0003
G" H"
Compounds having formula G" can exhibit cis-trans isomerism. In the cis isomer, R1 and " occur on the same face or side of the cyclohexyl ring, while in the trans isomer, R1 and R4 occur on opposite faces or sides of the cyclohexyl ring. In some embodiments, the methods and compositions of the invention include the use of a mixture of both the cis isomer and the trans isomer of a compound having formula G". In certain embodiments, the mixture contains at least about 50 percent (at least about 60 percent, at least about 70 percent, at least about 80 percent, at least about 90 percent, at least about 95 percent, at least about 98 percent, at least about 99 per cent) of the cis isomer. In other embodiments, the mixture contains at least about 50 percent (at least about 60 percent, at least about 70 percent, at least about 80 percent, at least about 90 percent, at least about 95 percent, at least about 98 percent, at least about 99 percent) of the trans isomer. In one aspect of the invention, both the cis and the trans isomer can be used in combination to treat a bacterial infection.
Representative compounds having Formula (VI) are provided in FIG. 3.
Combinations of substituents and variables envisioned by this invention are only those that result in the formation of stable compounds. The term "stable", as used herein, refers to compounds which possess stability sufficient to allow manufacture and which maintains the integrity of the compound for a sufficient period of time to be useful for the purposes detailed herein (e.g, therapeutic or prophylactic administration to a subject).
Compounds that can be useful in treating fungal infection can be identified through both in vitro (cell and non-cell based) and in vivo methods. A description of these methods is described in the Examples.
The compounds described herein can be obtained from commercial sources or synthesized by conventional methods as shown below.
Compounds having formula H", e.g, 4-substituted bicyclo[2.2.2]octane-l-carboxylic acids and 4-substituted bicyclo[2.2.2]octane-l-acetic acids can be prepared as shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 5. As shown in FIG. 4, the substituted acetone derivative (1) can be condensed with two equivalents of acrylonitrile in the presence of base to provide the bis-cyanoketones (2) following essentially the same procedure of Brunson and Reiner (Brunson, H. C; Reiner, T. W. J. Am. Chem. Soc, 1942, 64, 2850; and
Brunson, H. C; Reiner, T. W. J. Am. Chem. Soc, 1942, 64, 2857). The cyano moieties can then be hydrolyzed to the conesponding acids (3) by heating in aqueous sodium hydroxide followed by acidification. Intramolecular cyclization can be promoted under Perkin condensation conditions to ) provide 4-acetyl-4-R-cyclohexanone derivatives (4). The 4-substituted bicyclo[2.2.2]octane-l-ol derivatives (5) can then be prepared from 4 by intramolecular Aldol condensation. Reduction of the 3- oxo group of 5 can be achieved under Wolff-Kishner conditions to form 6. Alternatively, the 3-oxo group may first be converted to the bis-thioketal (not shown) using 1 ,2-ethanedithiol. The bis-thioketal can subsequently be reduced in the presence of Raney nickel to afford the des-keto derivative 6.
As shown in FIG. 5, compound 6 may be used to prepare compounds having formula H". Treatment of bicyclo[2.2.2]octan-l-ol 6 with a mixture of concentrated hydrobromic acid and zinc bromide can afford the conesponding tertiary bromide 7 in good yield. The bromo derivative can then be converted to the conespondmg carboxylic acid 8 using sulfuric acid, silver sulfate and formic acid following essentially the same method as that described in Koch and Haaf (W. Angew. Chem., 1958, 70, 3113). The acetic acid derivative 10 can be prepared as follows. Acid 8 can be reduced to the alcohol 9 by reduction with lithium aluminum hydride. Tosylate formation, followed by cyanide displacement and hydrolysis can provide 10. Other methods known in the art for the preparation of bicyclo[2.2.2]octane carboxylic acids (e.g, Holtz, H. D.; Stock, L. M. J. Am. Chem. Soc, 1964, 86, 5183-5188; Dewar, M. J. S.; Goldberg, R. S. J. Am. Chem. Soc, 1970, 92, 1582-1586; Kelly, S. M.; Schad, H. Helv. Chim. Acta, 1984, 67, 1580-1587; Osman, M. A.; Huynh-Ba, T. Helv. Chim. Acta, 1983, 66, 1786-1789; Gray, G. W.; Kelly, S. M. J. Chem. Soc, Chem. Commun, 1980, 465-466; Gray, G. W.; and Kelly, S. M. J. Chem. Soc, Chem. Commun, 1979, 974-975).
The compounds described herein can be separated from a reaction mixture and further purified by a method such as column chromatography, high-pressure liquid chromatography, or recrystallization. As can be appreciated by the skilled artisan, further methods of synthesizing the compounds of the formulae herein will be evident. Additionally, the various synthetic steps may be performed in an alternate sequence or order to give the desired compounds. Synthetic chemistry transformations and protecting group methodologies (protection and deprotection) useful in synthesizing the compounds described herein are known in the art and include, for example, those such as described in R. Larock, Comprehensive Organic Transformations, VCH Publishers (1989); T.W. Greene and P.G.M. Wuts, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 2d. Ed, John Wiley and Sons (1991); L. Fieser and M. Fieser, Fieser andFieser's Reagents for Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons (1994); and L. Paquette, ed. Encyclopedia of Reagents for Organic Synthesis, John Wiley and Sons (1995), and subsequent editions thereof.
The compounds of this invention may contain one or more asymmetric centers and thus occur as racemates and racemic mixtures, single enantiomers, individual diastereomers and diastereomeric mixtures. All such isomeric forms of these compounds are expressly included in the present invention. The compounds of this invention may also contain linkages (e.g, carbon-carbon bonds) wherein bond rotation is restricted about that particular linkage, e.g. restriction resulting from the presence of a ring or double bond. Accordingly, all cis/trans and E/Z isomers are expressly included in the present invention. The compounds of this invention may also be represented in multiple tautomeric forms, in such instances, the invention expressly includes all tautomeric forms of the compounds described herein, even though only a single tautomeric form may be represented (e.g, alkylation of a ring system may result in alkylation at multiple sites, the invention expressly includes all such reaction products). All such isomeric forms of such compounds are expressly included in the present invention. All crystal forms of the compounds described herein are expressly included in the present invention.
The compounds of this invention include the compounds themselves, as well as their salts and their prodrugs, if applicable. A salt, for example, can be formed between an anion and a positively charged substituent (e.g, amino) on a compound described herein. Suitable anions include chloride, bromide, iodide, sulfate, nitrate, phosphate, citrate, methanesulfonate, trifluoroacetate, and acetate. Likewise, a salt can also be formed between a cation and a negatively charged substituent (e.g, carboxylate) on a compound described herein. Suitable cations include sodium ion, potassium ion, magnesium ion, calcium ion, and an ammonium cation such as teframethylammonium ion. Examples of prodrugs include esters and other pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives, which, upon administration to a subject, are capable of providing active compounds.
The compounds of this invention may be modified by appending appropriate functionalities to enhance selective biological properties. Such modifications are known in the art and include those which increase biological penetration into a given biological compartment (e.g, blood, lymphatic system, central nervous system), increase oral availability, increase solubility to allow administration by injection, alter metabolism and alter rate of excretion.
EXAMPLE 7
Compounds of formula H" may be obtained by the methods described herein or obtained from the Aldrich Chemical Company (see sigmaaldrich.com) or Specs and Biospecs (see spec.net).
Compounds of formula G" may be obtained from TCI Americas (see tciamerica.com) or Avacado (see alfa.com). Compounds of formula F" may be obtained from Aldrich Chemical Company, TCI Americas, or Lancaster Synthesis (see lancastersynthesis.com).
EXAMPLE 8
Generation and Testing of Additional Compounds of Formula (VI)
Based on compounds that received a score of less than 5 in the morphology assay described above, a number of structurally related compounds having Formula (VI) were prepared and tested for the ability to inhibit fungal invasion. These compounds are depicted in the table of FIG. 6. In this Table the structure of the tested compound is depicted in the first column. Results are reported for the following tests, all of which are described in Example 2: C. albicans logarithmic phase growth invasion assay (column 2), C. albicans stationary phase growth invasion assay (column 3), C. albicans minimum inhibitory concentration (column 4), C albicans phenotype rating (no units) (column 5), and mammalian cell toxicity (column 6). All references cited herein, whether in print, electronic, computer readable storage media or other form, are expressly incorporated by reference in their entirety, including but not limited to, abstracts, articles, journals, publications, texts, treatises, internet web sites, databases, patents, and patent publications.
Other embodiments are in the claims.

Claims

A compound having a formula (A):
Figure imgf000079_0001
(A)
wherein,
each of R1, R2, R3, and R4 is, independently, hydrogen, or CrC6 alkyl;
Figure imgf000079_0002
B is CR7R8; or is absent;
Figure imgf000079_0003
the dashed lines between A and B and between B and C are bonds when B is present, or unshared electron pairs on A and C when B is absent;
R5 is hydrogen; or R5 and R7 together are a bond when B is present;
RD is RaC(0 , or is absent;
R7 and R5 together are a bond when B is present;
Rs is C C4 alkyl, optionally substituted with NR RC or RaC(0)
R9 is C6-Cio aryl, optionally substituted with hydrogen, halo, or C C4 alkyl;
R is hydrogen, or is absent; Ra is C C4 alkyl, optionally substituted with halo, NRbRc or -C(0)NHNHC(0)Rd;
Each of Rb and Rc is, independently, Cι-C6 alkyl, C2-C6 aminoalkyl, C2-C6 alkylaminoalkyl, C2-C6 dialkylaminoalkyl, C7-Cπ aralkyl, or ReC(0)-; or Rb and R° together are heterocyclyl, or heterocycloalkenyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 Rf;
Rd is C6-C10 aryl or 3-10 membered heteroaryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 Rg;
Re is C C6 alkyl, C7-Cι i aralkyl, C6-Cι0 aryl, or C6-Cι0 arylamino, each of which may be substituted with - C4 alkyl, halo or Cι-C4 alkoxy;
Rf is oxo or C C6 alkyl;
Rg is hydrogen, halo, hydroxy, alkoxy, nitro, amino, cyano, carboxy, -Cβ alkyl, C6-C]0 aryl, or 5-8 membered heteroaryl; and
X is O or S.
2. The compound of claim 1, wherein B is CHR7R8, R5 and R7 together are a bond, and R8 is substituted with NRbRc.
3. The compound of claim 2, wherein R8 is CH(NRbRc)CH3 or CH(NRbRc)CH2CH3.
4. The compound of claim 2, wherein Rb is (CH3)2NCH2CH2, benzyl, or Cι-C6 alkyl.
5. The compound of claim 2, wherein Rc is ReC(0)-.
6. The compound of claim 5, wherein Re is C5-Cn alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted Cβ- Cio arylamino, wherein the substituents are selected from CH3 or OCH3.
7. The compound of claim 1, wherein R9 is substituted or unsubstituted phenyl, wherein the substituents are selected from halo or Cι-C alkyl.
8. The compound of claim 7, wherein the substituents are CH3 and chloro.
9. The compound of claim 1, wherein B is absent.
10. A compound having a formula (O) :
Figure imgf000081_0001
(O)
wherein,
Each of R1 and R2 is, independently, C -C9 alkyl; C7-Cι0 aralkyl; C3-C9 alkenyl, optionally substituted with aryl; C3-C8 cycloalkyl, optionally substituted with C C alkyl; or RaC(0)-;
Each of R3, R4, Rs, and R6 is, independently, hydrogen or C C4 alkyl; and
Ra is 3-8 membered heterocyclyl, optionally substituted with acyl; C7-Cι6 aralkyl optionally substituted with halo; or C6-Cι0 arylamino, optionally substituted with 0-3 Cι-C alkyl.
11. The compound of claim 10, wherein one of R1 and R2 is C7-Cι0 aralkyl.
12. The compound of claim 11, wherein one of R1 and R2 is benzyl, -(CH2)2Ph, or -(CH2)3Ph.
13. The compound of claim 10, wherein one of R1 and R2 is C3-C9 alkenyl.
14. The compound of claim 10, wherein one of R1 and R2 is C4-C9 alkyl.
15. The compound of claim 13, wherein one of R1 and R2 is 3-phenylallyl.
16. The compound of claim 10, wherein R1 and R2 are C7-Cι0 aralkyl.
17. The compound of claim 10, wherein one of R1 and R2 is C7-C]0 aralkyl and the other is C3-C9 alkenyl.
18. A compound having a formula (L) :
Figure imgf000082_0001
wherein,
A is N or CH;
R1 is C Cι2 alkyl, C2-Cι2 alkenyl, 5-12 membered heteroaryl, or RaC(0)-;
R2 is C C]2 alkyl, optionally substituted with -NHC(0)Rb; or C1-C alkoxy;
Each of R3, R4, R5, and R6 is, independently, hydrogen, or C C4 alkyl;
Ra is CrC12 alkyl; and
Rb is C6-Cιo aryl.
19. The compound of claim 18, wherein R1 is C3-C]0 alkenyl.
20. The compound of claim 19, wherein R1 is -(CH2)6CH=CH2.
21. The compound of claim 18, wherein R2 is -OCH2CH3.
22. A compound having a formula (E):
Figure imgf000082_0002
80
(E) " """ wnerem,
R1 is C C4 alkyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 Ra; C7-C]6 aralkyl, optionally substituted with 1- 3 Ra; 6-16 membered heteroaralkyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 Ra; C3-C4 alkenyl, optionally substituted with 1 -2 Ra;
A is C6-Cιo aryloxy, optionally substituted with thioaryloxy or thioalkoxy; 3-8 membered heterocyclyl, optionally substituted with C7-CI6 aralkyl; or CHR7R8;
R2 is hydrogen or hydroxy; or R2 and R7 together are a bond;
Each of R3, R4, R5, and R6 is, independently, hydrogen, C C alkyl, or Cι-C4 alkoxy;
R7 is hydrogen; or R7 and R2 together are a bond;
R8 is aryl, optionally substituted with Cι-C4 alkoxy; and
Each Ra is, independently, hydroxy; Cι-C6 alkyl; C C alkoxy; C6-Cι0 aryloxy, optionally substituted with halo; 5-8 membered heteroaryl, optionally substituted with C C4 alkyl; C6-Cι0 aryl, optionally substituted with C2-C6 dialkylamino or methylenedioxo; C7-Cι6 aralkoxy; or allyloxy.
23. The compound of claim 22, wherein R1 is Cι-C4 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C7 aralkyl, or substituted or unsubstituted 6-membered heteroaralkyl, wherein the substituents are selected from C,-C2 alkoxy, benzyloxy, allyloxy, F, Br, (CH3)2N, CH3, methylenedioxo, or (CH3)2CHNHC(0)-.
24. The compound of claim 22, wherein A is CHR7R8.
25. The compound of claim 24, wherein R8 is C7 aralkyl.
26. The compound of claim 24, wherein R7 and R2 together are a bond.
27. The compound of claim 22, wherein A is aryloxy.
2S."'"" ""•"A"c'omμoiϊn'd'"HaVing a formula (C):
Figure imgf000084_0001
wherein,
Each of R , R , R , and R is, independently, hydrogen, halo, or -C alkyl;
R5 is hydrogen;
A is NR7 or CH2;
R6 is hydrogen; Cι-C6 alkylamino, optionally substituted with Ra; C6-Cι0 aryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 Ra; or C5-Cι0 heteroaryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 Ra; or R6 and R7 together are 3-8 membered heterocyclyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 Rb;
R7 is hydrogen; C7-Cι6 aralkyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 Rc; or -C(0)Rd; or R7 and R6 together are 3-8 membered heterocyclyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 R ;
Each Ra is, independently, halo; methylenedioxo; C6-C10 aryloxy, optionally substituted with halo; or Cι-C alkoxy;
Each Rb is, independently, hydroxy, oxo, or C C6 alkyl;
Each Rc is, independently, -C4 alkyl or C C alkoxy; and
Rd is C6-Cιo aryl, optionally substituted with halo or - alkyl; 5-8 membered heteroaryl; 3-8 membered heterocyclyl; or 5-10 membered heterocycloalkenyl.
29. The compound of claim 28, wherein A is CH2. 1 άϋ. rne compoun "orciaim 29, wherein R6 is C C4 alkylamino substituted with 4- halophenoxy.
31. The compound of claim 28, wherein A is NR7.
32. The compound of claim 31 , wherein R7 is C7 aralkyl or -C(0)Rd.
33. The compound of claim 32, wherein Rd is phenyl or halo-substituted phenyl.
34. A compound having a formula (AA):
Figure imgf000085_0001
(AA)
wherein, '
X is N or C;
A is -NHR3; -OR4; SR5; 3-8 membered heteroaryl, optionally substituted with Cβ arylsulfonyl that is substituted with l-3Ra; 3-8 membered heterocyclyl, optionally substituted with C6 arylsulfonyl that is substituted with l-3Ra;
R1 and R2 together are fused C6 aryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 Ra; or fused 5-membered heteroaryl, optionally substituted with 1-2 Ra;
Rf, R4, andRD are each, independently, C CI2 alkyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 Rb; C7-C 10 aralkyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 Rb; 6-12 membered heteroaralkyl, optionally substituted with with 1-3 Rb; 5-10 membered heteroaryl, optionally substituted with with 1-3 Rb; (C C3) alkylene-0-(C C4) alkyl; or (Cι-C3) alkylene-O-(C6-Cι0) aryl; • nacn KΓ IS, maepennentiy;'n'alo, C C6 alkyl, fused C5-C7 cycloalkyl, C6-Cι0 aryl or 5-10 membered heteroaryl; and
Each Rb is, independently, halo, Cι-C4 alkoxy, methylenedioxo, Cι-C haloalkyl, NH2, di(C C alkyl)amino, (C C alkyl)amino; or a salt thereof.
35. The compound of claim 34 wherein X is N.
36. The compound of claim 34, wherein A is -NHR3.
37. The compound of claim 34, wherein R3 is substituted or unsubstituted C C5 alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted C -C8 aralkyl, wherein the substituents are selected from halo, OCH3, methylenedioxo, or (CH3)2N.
38. A compound having a formula (AB) :
Figure imgf000086_0001
(AB)
wherein,
R1 is C5-C10 heteroaryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 Ra;
R2 is C6-Cιo arylsulfonyl, optionally substituted with halo; CrC6 alkyl; -C(0)R ; or C7-C16 aralkyl;
Each of R3, R4, R5, and R6 is hydrogen;
Each Ra is, independently, halo; C6-Cι0 aryl, optionally substituted with halo, hydroxy, or C C4 alkoxy; or C C4 alkyl; - igrjMBK-j 5-'i0'tnernuere"d"] eteroaryl; or C6-Cι0 aryl, optionally substituted withl-2 Cj-C2 alkoxy; and
Rc is C6-Cιo ary > optionally substituted with 1-3 halo.
39. The compound of claim 38, wherein R1 is substituted or unsubstituted quinazolinyl, quinolinyl, or pyrimidinyl.
40. The compound of claim 39, wherein R2 is -C4 alkyl or -C(0)Rb.
41. The compound of claim 40, wherein R2 is CH2CH3.
42. The compound of claim 40, wherein Rb is substituted or unsubstituted arylamino or heteroaryl.
43. (Class K) A compound having a formula (K) :
Figure imgf000087_0001
(K)
wherein,
R1 is C C7 alkyl, C7-C9 aralkyl, or-C(0)Ra;
R2 and R2' are each, independently, hydrogen; Cι-C4 alkyl; C3-C5 cycloalkyl; -C(0)Rb; C7-C16 aralkyl, optionally substituted with Rc; or 6-16 membered heteroaralkyl, optionally substituted with R°; or R2 and R2' together are 3-10 membered heterocyclyl, optionally substituted with 1-5 C C alkyl;
Each of R3, R4, R5, and R6 is hydrogen;
Ra is Cj-C4 alkyl or C C4 alkoxy; R°
Figure imgf000088_0001
membered heteroaryl, optionally substituted with Rc and/or 1-3 Rd;
Rc is C6-Cιo aryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 Rd; C6-Cι0 aryloxy, optionally substituted with 1- 3 Rd; C3-C8 cycloalkyl- - alkoxy; C6-CI0 arylamino, optionally substituted with 1-3 Rd; C6-Cι0 thioaryloxy, optionally substituted with 1-3 Rd; or C7-C16 aralkoxy, optionally substituted with 1-3 Rd; and
Each Rd is, independently, halo, CrC6 alkyl, C C4 alkoxy, or C C haloalkyl.
44. The compound of claim 43, wherein R1 is C C5 alkyl or C7-C8 aralkyl.
45. The compound of claim 43, wherein one of R2 and R2' is substituted or unsubstituted C7- Ci6 aralkyl, wherein substituents are selected from aryloxy substituted with CH3, CF3, halo, or OCH3.
46. The compound of claim 45, wherein one of R2 and R2' is substituted or unsubstituted benzyl, -(CH2)2Ph, or-(CH2)3Ph.
47. The compound of claim 43, wherein one of R2 and R2' is CH3.
48. The compound of claim 43, wherein one of R2 and R2' is hydrogen.
49. The compound of claim 43, wherein one of R1 and R2 is substituted or unsubstituted C7- Ci6 aralkyl and the other is CH3, wherein substituents are selected from aryloxy substituted with CH3, CF3, halo, or OCH3.
50. A compound having a formula (R):
Figure imgf000088_0002
(R)
wherein,
R1 is C,-C2 alkyl or C2 alkenyl; K' afid'«c;"are"eacιn,"lτιdep'e'hdently, hydrogen or CHR3R4;
R3 is C5-Cι heteroaryl, optionally substituted with C C alkoxy;
R4 is OR5;
R5 is C6-C]4 aryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 Ra; -C(0)R ; 6-14 membered heteroaryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 Ra; C7-Cι6 aralkyl, optionally substituted with 1-3 Ra;
Each Ra is, independently, halo, -Cβ alkyl, or -C alkoxy; and
Rb is C6-Cιo aryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 Ra; or 5-10 membered heteroaryl, optionally substituted with 1-3 Ra.
51. The compound of claim 50, wherein R1 is CH2CH3 or CH=CH2.
52. The compound of claim 50, wherein R3 is unsubstituted or methoxy-substituted quinolinyl.
53. The compound of claim 50, wherein R5 is aryl or heteroaryl.
54. The compound of claim 50, wherein the carbon to which R3 and R4 is attached has the S configuration.
55. The compound of claim 50, wherein the carbon to which R3 and R4 is attached has the R configuration.
56. A method of treating a fungal infection in a subject, the method comprising administering an effective amount of an anti-invasin agent and an antifungal agent.
57. The method of claim 56 wherein the antifungal agent is a fungistatic agent.
58. The method of claim 56 wherein the antifungal agent is a fungicidal agent.
59. A pharmaceutical composition comprising an anti-invasin agent and a fungistatic agent.
60. A pharmaceutical composition comprising an anti-invasin agent and a fungicidal agent. " 61. '•'•','A',cό'mpϋuii'a,Bavϊrig the formula (I):
Figure imgf000090_0001
(D or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein,
Ri is substituted or unsubstituted Cι-C]2 alkyl, or substituted or unsubstituted Cj-Cι2 alkoxy, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halo and hydroxy;
R2 is H or halo;
R3 is H, formyl, acetyl, or substituted or unsubstituted C C3 alkyl, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halo and hydroxy;
Each of R4-R8 is, independently:
)H;
(ii) halo;
(iii) substituted or unsubstituted Cι-Cι2 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C3-C10 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C2-Cj2 alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted C2-Cι2 alkynyl, or NH(C]-C6 ) alkyl), wherein the substituents are selected from hydroxy, halo, Cι-C!2 alkyl and C3-Ca-cycloalkyl; (iy)'OW 'bfu "• '■'"" "•" "" ,u""
(v) phenyl or heteroaryl optionally substituted with 1-5 R10;
R9 is C3-Cιo cycloalkyl, optionally substituted with halo or hydroxy; or C Cι2 alkyl, optionally substituted with halo, hydroxy, or C3-C10 cycloalkyl;
5 Each R10 is, independently, halo, hydroxy, ORa, OR , acyloxy, nitro, amino, NHRa, N(Ra)2,
NHRb, N(Rb)2, aralkylamino, mercapto, thioalkoxy, S(0)Ra, S(0)Rb, S02Ra, S02Rb, NHS02Ra, NHS02Rb, sulfate, phosphate, cyano, carboxyl, C(0)Ra, C(0)Rb, C(0)ORa, C(0)NH2, C(0)NHRa, C(0)N(Ra)2, alkyl, haloalkyl, C3-Cι0 cycloalkyl containing 0-3 R,., C3-C10 heterocyclyl containing 0-3 Rc, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, C5-C10 cycloalkenyl, C5-C10 heterocycloalkenyl, C6-C20 aryl containing 0-3 0 Rj, or C6-C20 heteroaryl containing 0-3 Rd;
Ra is C C6 alkyl optionally substituted with halo, hydroxy, alkoxy, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, sulfate, or phosphate;
Rb is aryl optionally substituted with halo, haloalkyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, nitro, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, sulfate, or phosphate;
5 Each Rc is independently halo, haloalkyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, oxo, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, sulfate, or phosphate;
Each Ra is independently halo, haloalkyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, nitro, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, sulfate, or phosphate;
provided that at least one of f-Rg is not hydrogen; further provided that when R1 is 0 (CH3)2CCH2CH3 or C(CH3)3, R6 is not CH3; further provided that when R1 is CH(CH3)2, R6 is not OCH3 or CH3; further provided that when R1 is CH3, R4 and R7 are not Cl; and further provided that when RI is C(CH3)3, R6 is not CH3.
62. The compound of claim 61, wherein R1 is C C4 alkyl.
63. The compound of claim 61, wherein R1 is CH3.
!5 64. The compound of claim 61, wherein R4, R5, R7, and R8 are H.
65. The compound of claim 61 , wherein R3 is H.
66. The compound of claim 61, wherein R6 is C C6 alkyl. -b1"r" " "1 hrc'ϋmpό'ϋ id of claim 61, wherein R6 is OR9.
68. The compound of claim 67, wherein R9 is C]-C6 alkyl.
69. The compound of claim 67, wherein R9 is C5-C8 cycloalkyl.
70. The compound of claim 69, wherein R9 is cyclopentyl.
71. The compound of claim 69, wherein R9 is 2-norbornyl.
72. The compound of claim 67, wherein R9 is C C4 alkyl substituted with C3-C5 cycloalkyl.
73. The compound of claim 61, wherein R6 is phenyl substituted with R10.
74. The compound of claim 73, wherein R10 is halo.
75. The compound of claim 73, wherein R or R is fluoro
76. A compound having the Formula (H):
Figure imgf000092_0001
(DO
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein,
each of R1 and R2 is, independently, H, substituted or unsubstituted Cι-12 alkyl, or substituted or unsubstituted Cι_12 alkoxy, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of hydroxy and halo;
R is H, formyl, acetyl, or substituted or unsubstituted C]-3 alkyl, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of hydroxy and halo; ■ - eacπ-orκ "-R" l's';' ϊffdepefldently:
(i) H;
(ii) halo;
(iii) substituted or unsubstituted Cι-I2 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C3-CI0 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C2-ι2 alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted C2-i2 alkynyl, or -NH-(Cι-s alkyl), wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, halo, CM alkyl, and C3-C8- cycloalkyl;
(iv) OR9; or
(v) phenyl or heteroaryl optionally substituted with 1-5 R10;
R9 is C3-Cιo cycloalkyl, optionally substituted with halo or hydroxy, or C Cι2 alkyl, optionally substituted with halo, hydroxy, or C3-Cι0 cycloalkyl;
Each of R10 is, independently, halo, hydroxy, ORa, ORb, acyloxy, nitro, amino, NHRa, N(Ra)2, NHRb, N(Rb)2, aralkylamino, mercapto, thioalkoxy, S(0)Ra, S(0)R , S02Ra, S02Rb, NHS02Ra, NHS02Rb, sulfate, phosphate, cyano, carboxyl, C(0)Ra, C(0)Rb, C(0)ORa, C(0)NH2, C(0)NHRa, C(0)N(Ra)2, alkyl, haloalkyl, C3-Cι0 cycloalkyl containing 0-3 Rc, C3-Cι0 heterocyclyl containing 0-3 Rc, C2-C6 alkenyl, C2-C6 alkynyl, C5-Cι0 cycloalkenyl, C5-C10 heterocycloalkenyl, C6-C20 aryl containing 0-3 Rd, or C6-C2o heteroaryl containing 0-3 R ;
Ra is Cj-Cβ alkyl optionally substituted with halo, hydroxy, alkoxy, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, sulfate, or phosphate;
Rb is aryl optionally substituted with halo, haloalkyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, nitro, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, sulfate, or phosphate;
Each Rc is independently halo, haloalkyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, oxo, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, sulfate, or phosphate; and
Each R is independently halo, haloalkyl, hydroxy, alkoxy, nitro, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, sulfate, or phosphate;
77. The compound of claim 76, wherein R4, R5, R7, and R8 are H.
78. The compound of claim 76, wherein R3 is H.
79. The compound of claim 76, wherein R1 is C C4 alkyl. M 1' ''"'"f Kέ"cθihϊp"θϊmd",6f claim 76, wherein R1 is CH3.
81. The compound of claim 76, wherein R is Cι-C6 alkyl.
82. The compound of claim 76, wherein Rδ is OR9.
83. The compound of claim 82, wherein R9 is Cι-C6 alkyl.
84. The compound of claim 82, wherein R9 is C5-C8 cycloalkyl.
85. The compound of claim 83, wherein R9 is cyclopentyl.
86. The compound of claim 83, wherein R9 is 2-norbornyl.
87. The compound of claim 82, wherein R9 is -C4 alkyl substituted with C3-C5 cycloalkyl.
88. The compound of claim 76, wherein R6 is phenyl substituted with R 10
89. The compound of claim 88, wherein R is halo.
90. The compound of claim 88, wherein R or R is fluoro.
91. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of Formula (ID and a pharmaceutically acceptable canier.
92. A compound having a formula (IH):
Figure imgf000094_0001
(in)
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein, 'te ciϊ M R'"and'K"" ,s;,lndependently, H, substituted or unsubstituted CW2 alkyl, or substituted or unsubstituted Cι-!2 alkoxy, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of hydroxy and halo;
R13 is H, formyl, acetyl, or substituted or unsubstituted -3 alkyl, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of hydroxy and halo;
each of R14-R18 is, independently, H, halo, substituted or unsubstituted CM2 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C3-C10 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C2-ι2 alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted C2- 12 alkynyl, substituted or unsubstituted C 2 alkoxy, substituted or unsubstituted C2-ι2 alkenyloxy, substituted or unsubstituted (C2-ι2 alkynyl)oxy, (C1-5 alkyl)oxy(Cι-6 alkyl), substituted or unsubstituted C6- 12 aryloxy, (C3-6 heteroaryl)-(Cι-6 alkyDoxy, (Cι-6 alkyl)thio, substituted or unsubstituted (CM alkyl)-thio- alkyl), substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted styryl, substituted or unsubstituted C3-12 heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted C -8 heterocyclic, -NH-C(0)-NH-(substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl), or -NR19R20, wherein each of R19 and R20 is, independently, H or C1-12 alkyl, wherein the substituents are selected from the group
consisting of hydroxy, halo, C1-4 alkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, ^ trihaloalkyl, Cι-6 alkoxy, ^ trihaloalkoxy, bivalent oxyalkyloxy, acylamino, amino, and azido.
93. A compound having a Formula (IV):
Figure imgf000095_0001
(IV)
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein eacrϊ or JKT ana
Figure imgf000096_0001
substituted or unsubstituted d-6 alkyl, or substituted or unsubstituted Cι-6 alkoxy, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of hydroxy and halo;
R23 is substituted or unsubstituted Cι.δ alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C3.10 cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C6-ι2 aryl, substituted or unsubstituted C3-ι2 heteroaryl, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halo, C1-6 alkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, and Cι-6 trihaloalkyl.
94. A compound having a Formula (V):
Figure imgf000096_0002
(V)
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein
each of R21 and R22 is, independently, substituted or unsubstituted Cι-6 alkyl, or substituted or unsubstituted Cι-6 alkoxy, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of hydroxy and halo;
R23 is substituted or unsubstituted .6 alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C3-ιo cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted C6-12 aryl, substituted or unsubstituted C3-!2 heteroaryl, wherein the substituents are selected from the group consisting of halo, Cι-6 alkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, and Cι-6 trihaloalkyl. tj5. i' .,.„« ^'priafma'ceuticaKdmposition comprising a compound having a formula (VI) in an amount effective to treat a fungal infection and a pharmaceutically acceptable canier,
Figure imgf000097_0001
( VI)
wherein:
R1 is (CH2)nC02H, wherein n is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5;
R1' and R2 , independently, are hydrogen or Cι-C6 alkyl, or R1' and R2' together are a bond, R3' and R4', independently, are hydrogen or CrC6 alkyl, or R3' and R4' together are a bond, R5' and R6', independently, are hydrogen or CrC6 alkyl, or R5' and R6' together are a bond, or R2', R3 , R5', and R6', independently, are hydrogen or C C6 alkyl and R1' and R4' together are a -C3 alkylene group;
each R2, R3, R5, and R6, independently, is hydrogen or Cι-C6 alkyl; and
R4 is: C Cι2 alkyl optionally substituted with C3-C8 cycloalkyl, halo, hydroxy, mercapto, Cι-Cι0 alkoxy, Ci-Cio thioalkoxy, amino, C Cιo alkylamino, Cι-Cι0 dialkylamino, or oxo; C3-C8 cycloalkyl optionally substituted with C3-C8 cycloalkyl, halo, hydroxy, mercapto, CrCι0 alkoxy, Cj-Cio thioalkoxy, amino, Cι-C10 alkylamino, C Cιo dialkylamino, or oxo; aryl optionally substituted with C3-C8 cycloalkyl, halo, C Cιo haloalkyl, hydroxy, mercapto, C Cj0 alkoxy, C Cι0 hydroxyalkyl, Ci- o thioalkoxy, amino, Cι-C10 alkylamino, Cι-Cι0 dialkylamino, or acyl; C2-Cι2 alkenyl optionally substituted with C3-C3 cycloalkyl, halo, hydroxy, mercapto, Cι-Cι0 alkoxy, Cι-CI0 thioalkoxy, amino, Ci- o alkylamino, Ci-Cio dialkylamino, or oxo; or C2-C12 alkynyl optionally substituted with C3-C8 cycloalkyl, halo, hydroxy, mercapto, Ci- o alkoxy, C o thioalkoxy, amino, C C10 alkylamino, C Cι0 dialkylamino, or oxo.
96. The composition of claim 95, wherein R1 and R2' together are a bond, R3' and R4' together are a bond, and R5' and R6 together are a bond.
97. The composition of claim 96, wherein n is 0 or 1.
98.',' hd fcό p6si#orilO dϊaiι ϊ'97, wherein R4 is C3-C6 alkyl.
99. The composition of claim 97, wherein R4 is C3-C6 cycloalkyl.
100. The composition of claim 95, wherein R2, R3, R5, and R6 are hydrogen.
101. The composition of claim 95, wherein R1', R2', R3', R4', R5', and R6' are hydrogen.
5 102. The composition of claim 101 wherein R1 and R4 are trans.
103. The composition of claim 101, wherein R1 and R4 are cis.
104. The composition of claim 101, wherein n is 0.
105. The composition of claim 104, wherein R4 is C3-C6 alkyl.
106. The composition of claim 105, wherein R1 and R4 are trans.
0 107. The composition of claim 101, further comprising a mixture of a cis isomer of the compound and a trans isomer of the compound.
108. The composition of claim 95, wherein R2', R3', R5', and R6' are hydrogen, and R1' and R4' together are a -CH2CH2- group.
109. The composition of claim 108, wherein n is 0 or 1.
5 110. The composition of claim 109, wherein R4 is C3-C6 alkyl.
111. The composition of claim 95, wherein n is 0.
112. The composition of claim 95, wherein n is 1.
113. The composition of claim 95, wherein n is 2.
114. The composition of claim 95, wherein n is 3.
!0 115. The composition of claim 95, wherein R4 is n-propyl.
116. The composition of claim 95, wherein R4 is n-butyl.
117. The composition of claim 95, wherein R4 is n-pentyl.
118. The composition of claim 95, wherein R4 is n-hexyl.
119. The composition of claim 95, wherein R4 is phenyl. il20.,'-Th:e)b6fflp'bsitioriOf dlaitn 95, wherein R4 is C3-C8 cycloalkyl.
121. The composition of claim 95, wherein R4 is C2-Cj2 alkenyl.
122. The composition of claim 95, wherein R4 is C2-C]2 alkynyl.
123. The composition of claim 95, wherein R4 is C Cι2 alkyl substituted with halo, hydroxy, C3- C8 cycloalkyl, C Cιo alkoxy, C Cι0 thioalkoxy, amino, C Cι0 alkylamino, C]-C10 dialkylamino,or oxo.
124. The composition of claim 95, further comprising an antimicrobial agent.
125. The composition of claim 124, wherein R1', R2', R3', R4', R5', and R6' are nydrogen and R1 and R4 are trans, and the antimicrobial agent is a compound of formula (VT):
Figure imgf000099_0001
( VI)
wherein:
R1 is (CH2)nC02H, wherein n is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5;
R1' and R2', independently, are hydrogen or Cι-C6 alkyl, or R1' and R2' together are a bond, R3' and R4', independently, are hydrogen or Cι-C6 alkyl, or R3' and R4' together are a bond, R5' and R6', independently, are hydrogen or C C6 alkyl, or Rs' and R6' together are a bond, or R2', R3', R5', and R6', independently, are hydrogen or Cι-C6 alkyl and R1' and R4' together are a C C3 alkylene group;
each R2, R3, R5, and R6, independently, is hydrogen or Cι-C6 alkyl; and
R is: C]-Cι2 alkyl optionally substituted with C3-C8 cycloalkyl, halo, hydroxy, mercapto, Ci- o alkoxy, C Cι0 thioalkoxy, amino, Cι-C10 alkylamino, Cι-C10 dialkylamino, or oxo; C3-C8 cycloalkyl optionally substituted with C3-C8 cycloalkyl, halo, hydroxy, mercapto, CrCι0 alkoxy, -Cio thioalkoxy, amino, C Cιo alkylamino, C o dialkylamino, or oxo; aryl optionally substituted with C3-C8 cycloalkyl, Jtιalo'j»tJ1"-(i'1o,hairJa'lky hydfOX ;"rrterc pto, -Cio alkoxy, C C10 hydroxyalkyl, CrCι0 thioalkoxy, amino, C]-C10 alkylamino, Cι-C10 dialkylamino, or acyl; C2-Cπ alkenyl optionally substituted with C3-C8 cycloalkyl, halo, hydroxy, mercapto, -Cio alkoxy, C C]0 thioalkoxy, amino, Cι-C]0 alkylamino, Ci- o dialkylamino, or oxo; or C2-C]2 alkynyl optionally substituted with C3-C8 cycloalkyl, halo, hydroxy, mercapto, C Cι0 alkoxy, Ci-Cio thioalkoxy, amino, C CI0 alkylamino, Cj-Cio dialkylamino, or oxo.
wherein R1', R2', R3', R4', R5', and R6' are hydrogen and R1 and R4 are cis.
126. A method of treating a fungal infection in a subject, the method comprising administering to the subject an effective amount of a compound having a formula selected from (A), (O), (L), (E), (C), (AA), (AB), (K), (R), (I), (TT), (in), (TV), (V), and (VI) .
127. The method of claim 126, further comprising administering to the subject an antifungal agent in combination with the compound.
128. The method of claim 126, wherein the compound and the antifungal agent are administered simultaneously.
129. The method of claim 126, wherein the compound and the antifungal agent are administered sequentially.
130. The method of claim 126, further comprising identifying the subject as a subject in need of treatment for a fungal infection.
131. The method of claim 126, wherein the subj ect is a human.
PCT/US2004/011187 2003-04-10 2004-04-12 Inhibitors of fungal invasion WO2004092123A2 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US46172703P 2003-04-10 2003-04-10
US60/461,727 2003-04-10
US46928603P 2003-05-09 2003-05-09
US60/469,286 2003-05-09
US48567803P 2003-07-09 2003-07-09
US60/485,678 2003-07-09

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2004092123A2 true WO2004092123A2 (en) 2004-10-28
WO2004092123A3 WO2004092123A3 (en) 2005-05-19

Family

ID=33303905

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2004/011187 WO2004092123A2 (en) 2003-04-10 2004-04-12 Inhibitors of fungal invasion

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2004092123A2 (en)

Cited By (45)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2006047397A1 (en) * 2004-10-21 2006-05-04 Dow Agrosciences Llc Thieno-pyrimidine compounds having fungicidal activity
WO2006097224A1 (en) * 2005-03-18 2006-09-21 Unilever Plc Novel resorcinol derivatives for skin
WO2006097223A1 (en) * 2005-03-18 2006-09-21 Unilever Plc Novel resorcinol derivatives
WO2007046809A1 (en) * 2005-10-21 2007-04-26 Dow Agrosciences Llc Thieno-pyrimidine compounds having fungicidal activity
JP2008513413A (en) * 2004-09-17 2008-05-01 ジャンセン ファーマシュウティカル エヌ ヴィ Novel thieno-pyridine and thieno-pyrimidine derivatives and their use as positive allosteric modulators of the MGLUR2-receptor
US7576080B2 (en) 2004-12-23 2009-08-18 Memory Pharmaceuticals Corporation Certain thienopyrimidine derivatives as phosphodiesterase 10 inhibitors
US7576212B2 (en) 2004-12-09 2009-08-18 Xention Limited Thieno[2,3-B] pyridines as potassium channel inhibitors
US7825122B2 (en) 2005-12-14 2010-11-02 Amgen Inc. Diaza heterocyclic sulfonamide derivatives and their uses
US7858786B2 (en) * 2005-05-04 2010-12-28 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incoropated Pyrimidines and pyrazines useful as modulators of ion channels
WO2011038776A1 (en) * 2009-10-02 2011-04-07 L'oreal Use of piperidine ester derivative as solvent in cosmetic compositions; cosmetic compositions comprising it
US8022076B2 (en) 2003-06-11 2011-09-20 Xention Limited Substituted thieno[2,3-d]pyrimidines as potassium channel inhibitors
WO2012044993A1 (en) * 2010-09-30 2012-04-05 The United States Of America, As Represented By The Secretary, Department Of Health And Human Services Compounds, pharmaceutical compositions, and methods of treating or preventing neurodegenerative diseases or disorders
US8252937B2 (en) 2007-09-14 2012-08-28 Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 1,3-disubstituted 4-(aryl-X-phenyl)-1H-pyridin-2-ones
US8299101B2 (en) 2007-03-07 2012-10-30 Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 1,4-disubstituted 3-cyano-pyridone derivatives and their use as positive mGluR2-receptor modulators
US8399493B2 (en) 2004-09-17 2013-03-19 Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Pyridinone derivatives and their use as positive allosteric modulators of mGluR2-receptors
US8722894B2 (en) 2007-09-14 2014-05-13 Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 1,3-disubstituted-4-phenyl-1H-pyridin-2-ones
WO2014039714A3 (en) * 2012-09-06 2014-10-02 Plexxikon Inc. Compounds and methods for kinase modulation, and indications therefor
WO2014179144A1 (en) * 2013-04-29 2014-11-06 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Fungicidal heterocyclic compounds
US9216992B2 (en) 2005-12-09 2015-12-22 Xention Limited Thieno[3,2-c]pyridine potassium channel inhibitors
WO2015193168A1 (en) * 2014-06-17 2015-12-23 Ucb Biopharma Sprl Fused bicyclic heteroaromatic derivatives as kinase inhibitors
WO2016102435A3 (en) * 2014-12-22 2016-09-09 Bayer Cropscience Aktiengesellschaft Novel isothiazolamides, processes for their preparation and their use as fungicides
US9708315B2 (en) 2013-09-06 2017-07-18 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv 1,2,4-triazolo[4,3-a]pyridine compounds and their use as positive allosteric modulators of MGLUR2 receptors
US9708348B2 (en) 2014-10-03 2017-07-18 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Trisubstituted bicyclic heterocyclic compounds with kinase activities and uses thereof
US9737533B2 (en) 2009-05-12 2017-08-22 Janssen Pharmaceuticals. Inc. 1,2,4-triazolo [4,3-A] pyridine derivatives and their use for the treatment of prevention of neurological and psychiatric disorders
US9751888B2 (en) 2013-10-04 2017-09-05 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Heterocyclic compounds and uses thereof
US9775844B2 (en) 2014-03-19 2017-10-03 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Heterocyclic compounds and uses thereof
US9828377B2 (en) 2013-10-04 2017-11-28 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Heterocyclic compounds and uses thereof
WO2018013711A1 (en) * 2016-07-12 2018-01-18 Matinas Biopharma Nanotechnologies, Inc. Encochleated antifungal compounds for central nervous system delivery and treatment of cryptococcus infections
US20180162868A1 (en) * 2016-12-09 2018-06-14 Xenon Pharmaceuticals Inc. Benzenesulfonamide compounds and their use as therapeutic agents
US10106542B2 (en) 2013-06-04 2018-10-23 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Substituted 6,7-dihydropyrazolo[1,5-a]pyrazines as negative allosteric modulators of mGluR2 receptors
US10160761B2 (en) 2015-09-14 2018-12-25 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Solid forms of isoquinolinones, and process of making, composition comprising, and methods of using the same
US10246453B2 (en) 2016-05-20 2019-04-02 Xenon Pharmaceuticals Inc. Benzenesulfonamide compounds and their use as therapeutic agents
US10464896B2 (en) 2015-06-11 2019-11-05 Basilea Pharmaceutica International AG Efflux-pump inhibitors and therapeutic uses thereof
CN110642855A (en) * 2019-10-21 2020-01-03 河南科技大学 Cinchonidine compound, preparation method and application thereof, and pesticide
US10537573B2 (en) 2014-01-21 2020-01-21 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Combinations comprising positive allosteric modulators or orthosteric agonists of metabotropic glutamatergic receptor subtype 2 and their use
CN110759905A (en) * 2019-10-21 2020-02-07 河南科技大学 9S-acyloxy cinchonine derivative, preparation method and application thereof, and botanical pesticide
US10745392B2 (en) 2018-06-13 2020-08-18 Xenon Pharmaceuticals Inc. Benzenesulfonamide compounds and their use as therapeutic agents
US10752623B2 (en) 2018-08-31 2020-08-25 Xenon Pharmaceuticals Inc. Heteroaryl-substituted sulfonamide compounds and their use as sodium channel inhibitors
US10759806B2 (en) 2016-03-17 2020-09-01 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Isotopologues of isoquinolinone and quinazolinone compounds and uses thereof as PI3K kinase inhibitors
US10919914B2 (en) 2016-06-08 2021-02-16 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Heterocyclic compounds and uses thereof
US10981905B2 (en) 2018-08-31 2021-04-20 Xenon Pharmaceuticals Inc. Heteroaryl-substituted sulfonamide compounds and their use as therapeutic agents
WO2021124272A1 (en) * 2019-12-19 2021-06-24 Liminal Biosciences Limited Cycloalkyl-containing carboxylic acids and uses thereof
US11071729B2 (en) 2007-09-14 2021-07-27 Addex Pharmaceuticals S.A. 1′,3′-disubstituted-4-phenyl-3,4,5,6-tetrahydro-2H,1′H-[1,4′]bipyridinyl-2′-ones
JP2022514364A (en) * 2018-12-21 2022-02-10 コリア ベーシック サイエンス インスティテュート A composition for the prevention or treatment of metabolic diseases containing a CYP4A inhibitory compound as an active ingredient.
US11369606B2 (en) 2014-01-21 2022-06-28 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Combinations comprising positive allosteric modulators or orthosteric agonists of metabotropic glutamatergic receptor subtype 2 and their use

Families Citing this family (12)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
AR059898A1 (en) 2006-03-15 2008-05-07 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv DERIVATIVES OF 3-CIANO-PIRIDONA 1,4-DISUSTITUTED AND ITS USE AS ALLOSTERIC MODULATORS OF MGLUR2 RECEIVERS
TW200845978A (en) 2007-03-07 2008-12-01 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv 3-cyano-4-(4-tetrahydropyran-phenyl)-pyridin-2-one derivatives
ES2637794T3 (en) 2007-11-14 2017-10-17 Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Imidazo [1,2-A] pyridine derivatives and their use as positive allosteric modulators of MGLUR2 receptors
AU2009289784B2 (en) 2008-09-02 2012-03-22 Addex Pharma S.A. 3-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexyl derivatives as modulators of metabotropic glutamate receptors
MX2011003691A (en) 2008-10-16 2011-09-06 Ortho Mcneil Janssen Pharm Indole and benzomorpholine derivatives as modulators of metabotropic glutamate receptors.
JP5690277B2 (en) 2008-11-28 2015-03-25 ジャンセン ファーマシューティカルズ， インコーポレイテッド． Indole and benzoxazine derivatives as modulators of metabotropic glutamate receptors
AU2010246607B2 (en) 2009-05-12 2012-09-27 Addex Pharma S.A. 1,2,4-triazolo[4,3-a]pyridine derivatives and their use as positive allosteric modulators of mGluR2 receptors
MY153913A (en) 2009-05-12 2015-04-15 Janssen Pharmaceuticals Inc 7-aryl-1,2,4-triazolo[4,3-a]pyridine derivatives and their use as positive allosteric modulators of mglur2 receptors
AU2011328195B2 (en) 2010-11-08 2015-04-02 Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 1,2,4-triazolo[4,3-a]pyridine derivatives and their use as positive allosteric modulators of mGluR2 receptors
JP5852666B2 (en) 2010-11-08 2016-02-03 ジヤンセン・フアーマシユーチカルズ・インコーポレーテツド 1,2,4-Triazolo [4,3-a] pyridine derivatives and their use as positive allosteric modulators of the mGluR2 receptor
PT2649069E (en) 2010-11-08 2015-11-20 Janssen Pharmaceuticals Inc 1,2,4-triazolo[4,3-a]pyridine derivatives and their use as positive allosteric modulators of mglur2 receptors
US8940742B2 (en) 2012-04-10 2015-01-27 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Heterocyclic compounds and uses thereof

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
DE60031285T2 (en) * 1999-08-27 2007-08-30 Chemocentryx Inc., Mountain View HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS AND METHOD FOR MODULATING CXCR3 FUNCTION
US6545004B1 (en) * 1999-10-27 2003-04-08 Cytokinetics, Inc. Methods and compositions utilizing quinazolinones
HUP0203430A3 (en) * 1999-10-27 2003-07-28 Cytokinetics Inc South San Fra Quinazolinones and their use

Cited By (82)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8022076B2 (en) 2003-06-11 2011-09-20 Xention Limited Substituted thieno[2,3-d]pyrimidines as potassium channel inhibitors
US8399493B2 (en) 2004-09-17 2013-03-19 Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Pyridinone derivatives and their use as positive allosteric modulators of mGluR2-receptors
JP2008513413A (en) * 2004-09-17 2008-05-01 ジャンセン ファーマシュウティカル エヌ ヴィ Novel thieno-pyridine and thieno-pyrimidine derivatives and their use as positive allosteric modulators of the MGLUR2-receptor
WO2006047397A1 (en) * 2004-10-21 2006-05-04 Dow Agrosciences Llc Thieno-pyrimidine compounds having fungicidal activity
JP2008517936A (en) * 2004-10-21 2008-05-29 ダウ アグロサイエンシィズ エルエルシー Thieno-pyrimidine compounds having fungicidal activity
US8008487B2 (en) * 2004-10-21 2011-08-30 Dow Agrosciences Llc Substituted thieno[2,3-D]pyrimidines as fungicides
US8193215B2 (en) 2004-12-09 2012-06-05 Xention Limited Thieno[2 3-b]pyridines as potassium channel inhibitors
US7576212B2 (en) 2004-12-09 2009-08-18 Xention Limited Thieno[2,3-B] pyridines as potassium channel inhibitors
US20100010017A1 (en) * 2004-12-23 2010-01-14 Memory Pharmaceuticals Corporation Certain thienopyrimidine derivatives as phosphodiesterase 10 inhibitors
US7576080B2 (en) 2004-12-23 2009-08-18 Memory Pharmaceuticals Corporation Certain thienopyrimidine derivatives as phosphodiesterase 10 inhibitors
KR101252315B1 (en) * 2005-03-18 2013-04-08 유니레버 엔.브이. Novel resorcinol derivatives for skin
US7468464B2 (en) 2005-03-18 2008-12-23 Unilever Home & Personal Care Usa, Division Of Conopco, Inc. Resorcinol derivatives for skin
WO2006097224A1 (en) * 2005-03-18 2006-09-21 Unilever Plc Novel resorcinol derivatives for skin
WO2006097223A1 (en) * 2005-03-18 2006-09-21 Unilever Plc Novel resorcinol derivatives
US7858786B2 (en) * 2005-05-04 2010-12-28 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incoropated Pyrimidines and pyrazines useful as modulators of ion channels
EP2078721A3 (en) * 2005-10-21 2009-07-22 Dow AgroSciences LLC Thieno-pyrimidime compounds having fungicidal activity
WO2007046809A1 (en) * 2005-10-21 2007-04-26 Dow Agrosciences Llc Thieno-pyrimidine compounds having fungicidal activity
US9216992B2 (en) 2005-12-09 2015-12-22 Xention Limited Thieno[3,2-c]pyridine potassium channel inhibitors
US7825122B2 (en) 2005-12-14 2010-11-02 Amgen Inc. Diaza heterocyclic sulfonamide derivatives and their uses
US8299101B2 (en) 2007-03-07 2012-10-30 Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 1,4-disubstituted 3-cyano-pyridone derivatives and their use as positive mGluR2-receptor modulators
US9067891B2 (en) 2007-03-07 2015-06-30 Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 1,4-disubstituted 3-cyano-pyridone derivatives and their use as positive allosteric modulators of mGluR2-receptors
US11071729B2 (en) 2007-09-14 2021-07-27 Addex Pharmaceuticals S.A. 1′,3′-disubstituted-4-phenyl-3,4,5,6-tetrahydro-2H,1′H-[1,4′]bipyridinyl-2′-ones
US8252937B2 (en) 2007-09-14 2012-08-28 Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 1,3-disubstituted 4-(aryl-X-phenyl)-1H-pyridin-2-ones
US8722894B2 (en) 2007-09-14 2014-05-13 Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 1,3-disubstituted-4-phenyl-1H-pyridin-2-ones
US9737533B2 (en) 2009-05-12 2017-08-22 Janssen Pharmaceuticals. Inc. 1,2,4-triazolo [4,3-A] pyridine derivatives and their use for the treatment of prevention of neurological and psychiatric disorders
US10071095B2 (en) 2009-05-12 2018-09-11 Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 1,2,4-triazolo [4,3-A] pyridine derivatives and their use for the treatment of neurological and psychiatric disorders
WO2011038776A1 (en) * 2009-10-02 2011-04-07 L'oreal Use of piperidine ester derivative as solvent in cosmetic compositions; cosmetic compositions comprising it
WO2012044993A1 (en) * 2010-09-30 2012-04-05 The United States Of America, As Represented By The Secretary, Department Of Health And Human Services Compounds, pharmaceutical compositions, and methods of treating or preventing neurodegenerative diseases or disorders
WO2014039714A3 (en) * 2012-09-06 2014-10-02 Plexxikon Inc. Compounds and methods for kinase modulation, and indications therefor
US10227357B2 (en) 2012-09-06 2019-03-12 Plexxikon Inc. Compounds and methods for kinase modulation, and indications therefor
WO2014179144A1 (en) * 2013-04-29 2014-11-06 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Fungicidal heterocyclic compounds
US10106542B2 (en) 2013-06-04 2018-10-23 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Substituted 6,7-dihydropyrazolo[1,5-a]pyrazines as negative allosteric modulators of mGluR2 receptors
US10584129B2 (en) 2013-06-04 2020-03-10 Janssen Pharmaceuticals Nv Substituted 6,7-dihydropyrazolo[1,5-a]pyrazines as negative allosteric modulators of mGluR2 receptors
US9708315B2 (en) 2013-09-06 2017-07-18 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv 1,2,4-triazolo[4,3-a]pyridine compounds and their use as positive allosteric modulators of MGLUR2 receptors
US12152032B2 (en) 2013-10-04 2024-11-26 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Heterocyclic compounds and uses thereof
US9828377B2 (en) 2013-10-04 2017-11-28 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Heterocyclic compounds and uses thereof
US9751888B2 (en) 2013-10-04 2017-09-05 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Heterocyclic compounds and uses thereof
US10329299B2 (en) 2013-10-04 2019-06-25 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Heterocyclic compounds and uses thereof
US11369606B2 (en) 2014-01-21 2022-06-28 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Combinations comprising positive allosteric modulators or orthosteric agonists of metabotropic glutamatergic receptor subtype 2 and their use
US12048696B2 (en) 2014-01-21 2024-07-30 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Combinations comprising positive allosteric modulators or orthosteric agonists of metabotropic glutamatergic receptor subtype 2 and their use
US10537573B2 (en) 2014-01-21 2020-01-21 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Combinations comprising positive allosteric modulators or orthosteric agonists of metabotropic glutamatergic receptor subtype 2 and their use
US11103506B2 (en) 2014-01-21 2021-08-31 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Combinations comprising positive allosteric modulators or orthosteric agonists of metabotropic glutamatergic receptor subtype 2 and their use
US9775844B2 (en) 2014-03-19 2017-10-03 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Heterocyclic compounds and uses thereof
US10675286B2 (en) 2014-03-19 2020-06-09 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Heterocyclic compounds and uses thereof
US11541059B2 (en) 2014-03-19 2023-01-03 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Heterocyclic compounds and uses thereof
US9969748B2 (en) 2014-06-17 2018-05-15 Ucb Biopharma Sprl Fused bicyclic heteroaromatic derivatives as kinase inhibitors
JP2017518384A (en) * 2014-06-17 2017-07-06 ユーシービー バイオファルマ エスピーアールエル Fused bicyclic heteroaromatic derivatives as kinase inhibitors
WO2015193168A1 (en) * 2014-06-17 2015-12-23 Ucb Biopharma Sprl Fused bicyclic heteroaromatic derivatives as kinase inhibitors
US10253047B2 (en) 2014-10-03 2019-04-09 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Heterocyclic compounds and uses thereof
US10941162B2 (en) 2014-10-03 2021-03-09 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Heterocyclic compounds and uses thereof
US9708348B2 (en) 2014-10-03 2017-07-18 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Trisubstituted bicyclic heterocyclic compounds with kinase activities and uses thereof
WO2016102435A3 (en) * 2014-12-22 2016-09-09 Bayer Cropscience Aktiengesellschaft Novel isothiazolamides, processes for their preparation and their use as fungicides
US10464896B2 (en) 2015-06-11 2019-11-05 Basilea Pharmaceutica International AG Efflux-pump inhibitors and therapeutic uses thereof
US11939333B2 (en) 2015-09-14 2024-03-26 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Solid forms of isoquinolinones, and process of making, composition comprising, and methods of using the same
US11247995B2 (en) 2015-09-14 2022-02-15 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Solid forms of isoquinolinones, and process of making, composition comprising, and methods of using the same
US10160761B2 (en) 2015-09-14 2018-12-25 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Solid forms of isoquinolinones, and process of making, composition comprising, and methods of using the same
US10759806B2 (en) 2016-03-17 2020-09-01 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Isotopologues of isoquinolinone and quinazolinone compounds and uses thereof as PI3K kinase inhibitors
US10662184B2 (en) 2016-05-20 2020-05-26 Xenon Pharmaceuticals Inc. Benzenesulfonamide compounds and their use as therapeutic agents
US11299490B2 (en) 2016-05-20 2022-04-12 Xenon Pharmaceuticals Inc. Benzenesulfonamide compounds and their use as therapeutic agents
US10815229B1 (en) 2016-05-20 2020-10-27 Xenon Pharmaceuticals Inc. Benzenesulfonamide compounds and their use as therapeutic agents
US10246453B2 (en) 2016-05-20 2019-04-02 Xenon Pharmaceuticals Inc. Benzenesulfonamide compounds and their use as therapeutic agents
US10919914B2 (en) 2016-06-08 2021-02-16 Infinity Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Heterocyclic compounds and uses thereof
CN109689028A (en) * 2016-07-12 2019-04-26 马丁尼斯生物制药纳米技术公司 The antifungal compound of the lipid volume encapsulating of Cryptococcus infections is delivered and treated for central nervous system
CN114053417A (en) * 2016-07-12 2022-02-18 马丁尼斯生物制药纳米技术公司 Cochleate encapsulated antifungal compounds for central nervous system delivery and treatment of cryptococcus infections
US11123295B2 (en) 2016-07-12 2021-09-21 Matinas Biopharma Nanotechnologies, Inc. Encholeated antifungal compounds for central nervous system delivery and treatment of Cryptococcus infections
WO2018013711A1 (en) * 2016-07-12 2018-01-18 Matinas Biopharma Nanotechnologies, Inc. Encochleated antifungal compounds for central nervous system delivery and treatment of cryptococcus infections
US11174268B2 (en) 2016-12-09 2021-11-16 Xenon Pharmaceuticals Inc. Benzenesulfonamide compouds and their use as therapeutic agents
US20180162868A1 (en) * 2016-12-09 2018-06-14 Xenon Pharmaceuticals Inc. Benzenesulfonamide compounds and their use as therapeutic agents
RU2760303C2 (en) * 2016-12-09 2021-11-23 Ксенон Фармасьютикалз Инк. Benzenesulfonamide compounds and their use as therapeutic agents
WO2018106284A1 (en) * 2016-12-09 2018-06-14 Xenon Pharmaceuticals Inc. Benzenesulfonamide compounds and their use as therapeutic agents
CN110325531B (en) * 2016-12-09 2022-05-27 泽农医药公司 Benzenesulfonamides and their use as therapeutic agents
CN110325531A (en) * 2016-12-09 2019-10-11 泽农医药公司 Benzsulfamide and its purposes as therapeutic agent
US10745392B2 (en) 2018-06-13 2020-08-18 Xenon Pharmaceuticals Inc. Benzenesulfonamide compounds and their use as therapeutic agents
US11325902B2 (en) 2018-06-13 2022-05-10 Xenon Pharmaceuticals Inc. Benzenesulfonamide compounds and their use as therapeutic agents
US11639351B2 (en) 2018-08-31 2023-05-02 Xenon Pharmaceuticals Inc. Heteroaryl-substituted sulfonamide compounds and their use as therapeutic agents
US10981905B2 (en) 2018-08-31 2021-04-20 Xenon Pharmaceuticals Inc. Heteroaryl-substituted sulfonamide compounds and their use as therapeutic agents
US10752623B2 (en) 2018-08-31 2020-08-25 Xenon Pharmaceuticals Inc. Heteroaryl-substituted sulfonamide compounds and their use as sodium channel inhibitors
JP2022514364A (en) * 2018-12-21 2022-02-10 コリア ベーシック サイエンス インスティテュート A composition for the prevention or treatment of metabolic diseases containing a CYP4A inhibitory compound as an active ingredient.
CN110642855A (en) * 2019-10-21 2020-01-03 河南科技大学 Cinchonidine compound, preparation method and application thereof, and pesticide
CN110759905A (en) * 2019-10-21 2020-02-07 河南科技大学 9S-acyloxy cinchonine derivative, preparation method and application thereof, and botanical pesticide
CN110759905B (en) * 2019-10-21 2021-05-11 河南科技大学 A kind of 9S-acyloxycinchonine derivatives and preparation method and application thereof, botanical insecticide
WO2021124272A1 (en) * 2019-12-19 2021-06-24 Liminal Biosciences Limited Cycloalkyl-containing carboxylic acids and uses thereof

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
WO2004092123A3 (en) 2005-05-19

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2004092123A2 (en) Inhibitors of fungal invasion
US7105554B2 (en) Benzylidene thiazolidinediones and their use as antimycotic agents
ES2315566T3 (en) TIAZOLIDIN-4-ONAS TO INHIBIT HYAK3 PROTEINS.
JP4869072B2 (en) Thiazoles and oxazoles useful as modulators of ATP binding cassette transporters
KR20080053297A (en) Modulators of Cystic Fibroma Transmembrane Conductivity Regulators
KR20060121909A (en) Modulators of AT-Linked Cassette Transporters Including Cycloalkyl or Pyranyl Groups
KR20030011377A (en) Five-membered-ring Compound
EP2804476A1 (en) Compounds and methods for treating candidiasis and aspergillus infections
EP1313731B1 (en) Thiazolidine derivatives and its use as antifungal agent
Prakasha et al. Design, synthesis and antimicrobial screening of amino acids conjugated 2-amino-4-arylthiazole derivatives
US20110263550A1 (en) Therapeutic agent for chronic obstructive pulmonary disease
US20040106663A1 (en) Inhibitors of fungal invasion
US11274074B2 (en) Pharmaceutical composition for ANO1 antagonist with anticancer activity
CN105820163B (en) Substituted 1,3-heteroazole compounds, preparation method thereof, pharmaceutical composition containing same and use thereof
EP0545376B1 (en) Guanidino thiazoles and their use as H2-receptor antagonist
UA110102C2 (en) 8-HYDROXYCHINOLINE-7-CARBOXAMIDE SECONDARY DERIVATIVES FOR THEIR APPLICATION AS ANTI-FUNCTIONAL PRODUCTS
KR20040095329A (en) κ-OPIOID RECEPTOR AGONIST COMPRISING 2-PHENYLBENZOTHIAZOLINE DERIVATIVE
CN108440414A (en) Pyrazolone amides antifungal drug and its preparation method and application
JP2007517886A (en) New chemical compounds
CN105646439A (en) Synergist for antifungal drugs, and preparation and application thereof
CN101146804B (en) 5-(1,3-diaryl-1h-pyrazol-4-ylmethylene)-thiazolidine-2,4-dione derivatives useful as anticancer agent
AU2014222362A1 (en) Formulation comprising benzothiazolone compound
UA109422C2 (en) 8-HYDROXYCHINOLINE-7-CARBOXAMIDE SECONDARY DERIVATIVES
US11229641B2 (en) Inhibitors of Bcl-2
CA2132722A1 (en) Benzothiazole-substituted benzyl alcohols as leukotriene antogonists

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BW BY BZ CA CH CN CO CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EC EE EG ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NA NI NO NZ OM PG PH PL PT RO RU SC SD SE SG SK SL SY TJ TM TN TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VC VN YU ZA ZM ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): BW GH GM KE LS MW MZ SD SL SZ TZ UG ZM ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HU IE IT LU MC NL PL PT RO SE SI SK TR BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GQ GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase